JP6631597B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  Related to gaming machines.

  One game is started when a game start instruction device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and a plurality of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery of a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine). The rotating drums (reels) in a plurality of rows are rotated, and the rotating drums are stopped by making full use of a rotating drum stop device (stop button) for stopping the rotating motion. As a result, a predetermined symbol is displayed on the activated line. (For example, a winning combination such as "777") are arranged in a special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the lottery probability of a small combination, etc. is higher than in the normal state). ) Is common. Here, in the case of a spinning-type gaming machine, when an image for staging to enhance the interest of the game is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal in a form synchronized with the rotation and stop operations of the reel. It is configured to predict and enjoy the game result while comparing the symbol displayed on the torso with the effect image and the like displayed on the display when operating the torso stop device or the like. There are many things. In addition, there are many types of gaming machines that can be configured to generate an error that stops the progress of the game if any abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In recent years, as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and when the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot ( The game is shifted to a special game state, and a pachinko game machine that can acquire a large amount of prize balls by opening a large winning opening provided on a game board surface is mainstream. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability varying gaming state in which the winning probability in the jackpot lottery is raised, and a time shortening gaming state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is increased. There is also a gaming machine that includes a game state and creates a game progress state that is advantageous for the player based on the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

JP2017-042352 JP 2014-079419 JP-A-2006-243243

  It is desired to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly playing a game.

The gaming machine according to this aspect,
A reel unit including a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols,
A gaming machine housing with an open front,
A front door that is connected to a left side of the gaming machine housing in a front view via a hinge mechanism and that can be opened and closed,
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel;
With
It is configured so that a power-off process can be performed after a power-off occurs,
Inside the gaming machine housing,
The reel unit;
A fixing portion for fixing the reel unit,
A main tank member for storing game media,
An auxiliary tank member that is installed near the main tank member and stores game media overflowing from the main tank member;
Is provided,
A slope portion descending from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a part of the main tank member,
The reel unit and the fixing portion are configured to be held by a plurality of locking components having conductivity,
In a state in which the reel unit and the fixing portion are held by the plurality of locking parts, a predetermined locking on the rightmost side in the front view of the gaming machine housing among the plurality of locking parts. The slope portion is disposed vertically below the component,
In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing, a first member and a second member for detecting whether the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full or not. At least, the distance between the first member and the second member is configured to be longer than the longitudinal length of the predetermined locking component,
In the game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player being received,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels stopped due to a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player being received have the predetermined symbol. After the symbols corresponding to the combination are stopped, and after the stop operation is received at a predetermined timing for a predetermined reel corresponding to the final stop operation of the player after the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, It is configured to be able to provide a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to a player,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels stopped due to a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player being accepted are provided with the predetermined state. The symbols corresponding to the symbol combinations are stopped, and the plurality of reels are stopped despite the stop operation being received at the predetermined timing with respect to the predetermined reel as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. It is configured such that the game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided to the player even under a predetermined situation where the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped when the game is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized in that:
<Appendix>
In addition, although another aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these.
The gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A belt-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel band MO) wound around an outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW);
On the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along a longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
The type of the symbol has at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a length in a longitudinal direction of the reel tape is longer than an outer circumference of a surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

  According to the gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can smoothly play a game.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the embodiment in a state where a door is opened. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the inside of a medal slot in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view and a top view of the medal payout device in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a list of reel arrangement in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a symbol combination list 1 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a symbol combination list 2 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a symbol combination list 3 in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a list of small wins, replays, and bonus appearance rates in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a setting change device control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a non-returnable error process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (second game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of a game progress control process (third game) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of AT state transition control processing (first sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (second sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the AT state transition control processing (third sheet) on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a condition device number management process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of AT state start control processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a game section shift control process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the spine drive control processing on the main control board side in the spine-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the spine drive control processing on the main control board side in the spine-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an image diagram related to a reel rotating operation in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of power-off processing on the main control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is an image diagram of a pressing order display in the turning-type gaming machine according to the present example. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a sub-program start process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a sub main loop process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a sub power-off process on the sub control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of one-command processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a staging-related effect determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a battle effect execution availability determination process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the AT effect determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the resumability determination effect determination processing on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a process during AT during start lever operation on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the special precursor sign process at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the additional processing at the time of operating the start lever on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of processing during the inside of the advantageous BB when the start lever is operated on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a process for receiving a first torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of a process for accepting a second torso stop on the sub-control board side in the torso gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of the third barrel stop effect-related determination processing on the sub-control board side in the barrel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the third time cylinder stop accepting process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a menu screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a standby screen display control process on the sub-control board side in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 58 is a conceptual diagram of a transition to a standby screen in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 59 is a memory map configuration diagram applicable to the gaming machine according to this example. FIG. 60 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 61 is an action diagram of a replayed game that can be applied to the gaming machine according to the present example, in which the game is won. FIG. 62 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 63 is an action diagram in a won game of a re-game applicable to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. FIG. 3 is a side sectional view schematically showing a relative position between a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view which shows the structure inside a hopper. It is a front view which shows the outline of the relative position of a reel and a hopper. It is a perspective view showing arrangement of medal auxiliary tank HS and fullness detection electrode DE. It is the schematic which shows the size and position of a fullness detection electrode and a screw BS. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band. It is a figure showing composition of a reel band.

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The “random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lot by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a spinning-type gaming machine, and includes pseudo-random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers) Is a hard random number, a built-in random number generated by a main control chip including a CPU, and a soft random number as a pseudo random number. For example, a so-called “basic random number” that affects the outcome of a game, specifically, a “winning random number” associated with a special role or a prize role (small role, replaying role) for shifting to a special game, and the like. Can be mentioned. The “CPU” has the same meaning as that known in the art, and is not limited in any way to the architecture (CISC, RISC, number of bits, etc.) or processing performance used. “Power interruption (power interruption)” means that the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine has fallen below a certain level irrespective of whether or not the power switch provided on the gaming machine has been operated. This also includes shutting off the power supply due to an unexpected situation such as damage to the unit or power failure. The “ROM” has the same meaning as that known in the art, and physically holds information (for example, “1” if an element configuration which is conductive when a current for reading data is given, If the element configuration is not used, it is "0"). A RAM is synonymous with one well known in the art, and holds information electrically (for example, when a current for reading data is given, “1” is stored if it is stored; This is set to “0.” It is general that backup power is supplied to part or all of the data held in the RAM when power is cut off.) The "game state" corresponds to, for example, a special game state in which a game medal is easy to obtain and is advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, which is referred to as a bonus game, a first type BB, a second type BB, or the like). ), A winning state of a replaying game (RT state) in which the winning rate of a replaying game is higher (or lower) than a normal gaming state in which a winning rate of the replaying game is a predetermined value, , An AT (assist time) state that can notify the stop order of the reels and the stop position, and an ART (assist replay time) state in which the RT state and the AT state are combined. Also, in the normal gaming state, the transition to the RT state, the AT state, and the ART state has different lottery probabilities, a high-probability normal gaming state, a low-probability normal gaming state, and the like (in this example, this is referred to as a lottery state). ). Also, there is no problem even if the game states are combined. Furthermore, these game states and functions (for example, a lottery transition to the AT-in-progress state, output of a notification instruction related to the reel stop order, and the like) control the game progress. There is no problem even if all are mounted on the main control board side. Further, in this example, the state relating to the AT and the RT state are separately described, and the RT state is referred to as "RT1" and the state relating to the AT is referred to as "normal game state". May be collectively referred to as an ART-related state, and the ART-related state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or the like. The “winning combination” is the type (or condition device number) of the condition device that has been won by the internal lottery. The “notification state” refers to a state relating to an AT capable of executing a push order navigation, which will be described later, and is a game in which a condition device in which the push order navigation is not executed because the winning combination does not differ according to the reel stop order is selected. If the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation can be executed, the state is set to the “notification state”. The “counter value” is also referred to as the “information game executable number”, and is the AT remaining game number or the counter value of the AT counter M60, which will be described later. For example, when the “available number of notification games” is 1 or more (this game including “0” may be included), a push order navigation described later may be executed. In addition, as the “number of noticeable game executions”, the difference number of game media (number of payouts minus number of inserts) obtained based on the winning of the small role (mainly the push order bell role) or the number of pushes The number of wins of the role of the forward bell may be adopted. The “special notification state” is the state that is most advantageous to the player among the states related to the AT, and in this example, is referred to as the “additional specialization state”. The “specific condition” is a condition under which the AT counter value can be decremented. For example, the specific condition is that one game is completed, a predetermined combination (for example, a pressing order bell combination) is won, and the like. "Type 1 special character" is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winnings per specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winnings per specified number operates. When the game is performed, the game can be continued until the result of the game that does not exceed 12 is obtained, and is sometimes referred to as RB (regular bonus). A "type 1 special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate a type 1 special accessory, when it is activated when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated at this point, and may be referred to as a BB (Big Bonus) or a first type BB. "Type 2 special role" is a role that activates the condition device related to winning regardless of the result of the role lottery. It is activated when predetermined and the result of one game is obtained. In this case, the operation is terminated and may be referred to as CB (Challenge Bonus). A "second-class special accessory continuous operation device" is a device that can continuously operate a second-class special accessory, which is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed and is predetermined. The operation is terminated at this point, and may be referred to as MB (middle bonus) or second type BB. The `` ordinary character '' is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning for each specified number is activated. The operation is performed when the combination is displayed, and the operation is terminated when the result of one game is obtained, and may be referred to as SB (single bonus). The “all JACIN type” has a configuration in which it is considered that JACIN has been performed when the first type BB combination has been won, and the RB is always being performed during execution of the first type BB. The “JACIN lottery type” has a configuration in which non-RB and RB are repeatedly executed when the first type BB is executed. In addition, the "uncontrolled reel" is a reel in a state in which the pull-in control that can be performed after the stop operation is performed is not executed, and is a state where the reel is stopped at the nearest reel position that can be stopped from the reel position where the stop operation is received. Reel. The “all CB type” is a configuration in which the CB is always in CB when the second type BB is executed. The “CB transfer lottery type” is a configuration in which the non-CB and the CB are repeatedly executed when the second type BB is executed.

  Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the order of each step in various processes, the timing of turning on / off a flag, the name of a unit responsible for the processing of each step, and the like are described as an example. It is not limited to the following embodiment. In addition, it should not be understood that the above-described embodiments and modified examples are applied to specific ones in a limited manner, and any combination may be used. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of one embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if a certain modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is a certain modification. It should be understood that combinations of the modifications and the other modifications are also described.

(This embodiment)
Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, a basic structure on the front side of a spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The spinning-type gaming machine P mainly includes a front door (also referred to as a front door), a back box (also referred to as a cabinet and a base), a reel unit installed in the back box, a hopper device, a power supply unit E, and a main control. A board M (a board on which the main control chip C including the CPUMC is mounted) and a sub-control board S (a board on which the sub-control chip SC including the CPUSC is mounted). Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

<Front door DU>
The front door DU includes a mechanism for visually recognizing a game state, a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium, a mechanism for operating a reel unit, other mechanisms, and the like. Specifically, as a mechanism for making the game state visually recognizable, a reel window D160, an insertion number display lamp D210, a start lamp D180, a re-game lamp D290, an insertion possible lamp D300, a special game state display device D250, a credit number A display device D200, a payout number display device (push order display device) D270 (sometimes referred to as a push order display device D270), an AT counter value display device D280, an advantageous section display YH, and the like are attached. In addition, as a mechanism for enabling the insertion of game media and inputting the number of bets (the number of bets), a mechanism for enabling a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, and a payout of the inserted game media, Button D60 is attached. As a mechanism for operating the reel, a start lever D50 and a stop button D40 are attached. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a medal slot D170, a bet button D220, a settlement button D60, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2, and the like. It has a console that protrudes to the side. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

<Mechanism for making the game state visible>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for making the game state visible. The reel window D160 is a transparent member formed of a synthetic resin or the like that forms a part of the front door DU, and is configured so that the reel unit installed in the gaming machine frame can be visually recognized through the reel window D160. Further, the insertion number display light D210 is configured by three LEDs, and the same number of LEDs as the number of medals currently bet (inserting a game medal required to start one game) are lit. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the insertion number display lamp D210 is configured by three LEDs (lamps) of a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, and a 3-bet lamp D213, and one game medal is bet. In this case, the 1-bet lamp D211: lights up, the 2-bet lamp D212: turns off, and the 3-bet lamp D213: turns off. If there are two game medals bet, the 1-bet lamp D211: turns on and the 2-bet lamp D212. : ON, 3-BET lamp D213: OFF, and when 3 game medals are bet, 1-BET lamp D211: ON, 2-BET lamp D212: ON, 3-BET lamp D213: ON (Re-game) This is not the case with the next game in which is stopped and displayed, and details will be described later). The start lamp D180 is configured by an LED, and is lit when the operation of the start lever D50 is valid (operation is received), and is invalid (operation is not received) when the operation of the start lever D50 is invalid. It is configured to turn off the light in a certain case. Further, the re-game lamp D290 is configured by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when the re-game is stopped and displayed, and turned off when the next game in which the re-game is stopped is completed. Further, the insertable lamp D300 is turned on (or may blink) when the insertion of the game medal into the medal insertion slot D170 is valid or the operation of the bet button D220 is valid, and the insertion of the game medal is performed. The light is turned off when the operation is invalid or the operation of the bet button D220 is invalid. Further, the special game state display device D250 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of payouts paid out during the special game. It should be noted that the special game state display device D250 may not be provided, and in such a case, the total number of the payouts may be displayed on the effect display device S40 (also referred to as a second information display unit) described later. Is displayed, the player can recognize the total number of payouts paid out during the special game, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. The credit number display device D200 is configured by a 7-segment display, and is configured to display the total number of medals (the number of credits) stored in the gaming machine as medals possessed by the player. The number-of-payouts display device (push-order display device) D270 is constituted by a seven-segment display. The number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button) (The stop order of D43) is a condition device in which the winning combination may be different. This is a so-called pushing sequence (sometimes also referred to as a pushing sequence combination). Is generally configured so that the profit rate (payout number, subsequent RT state, etc.) given to the player can be different. In a game in which｝ is established, the reel which is most advantageous to the player is The stop order is configured to be notified (the notification may be referred to as a push order navigation). As described above, the payout amount display device (push order display device) D270 is configured to be able to execute two displays of the number of game medals currently paid out and the reel stop order that provides the player with the highest profit. The display mode is such that the player does not mistakenly determine which of the two displays is being executed, and the details of the display mode will be described later. Further, the AT counter value display device D280 plays a game according to the push order navigation display displayed on the push order display device D270 (also referred to as a first information display unit) among the states related to the AT (details will be described later). It is possible to display the number of games that can stay in a state related to the AT (in this example, also referred to as a push order navigation state and a notification game, which will be described in detail later) that is advantageous to the player and that is guaranteed for the player when the game proceeds. It is configured as follows. The AT counter value display device D280 may not be provided. In such a case, the number of games that can stay in the AT state is displayed on the effect display device S40. Can recognize the number of games for which the state regarding the advantageous AT is guaranteed, and can provide a user-friendly gaming machine. The number-of-payouts display device (push-order display device) D270 may be configured to be divided into two devices, a number-of-payouts display device and a push-order display device.

  In addition, the advantageous section indicator YH is configured by an LED, and is configured to be turned on when it is a “advantageous section” and to be turned off when it is not an “advantageous section” (for lighting and extinguishing timings, See below). Here, in the case of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, similarly to the conventional spinning-type gaming machine, a special gaming state in which game medals are easily obtained and advantageous to the player (a so-called big hit game, a bonus game, And the first type BB, the second type BB, etc.), the winning rate of the replaying game is higher (or lower) than the normal gaming state in which the winning rate of the replaying game is a predetermined value. The replay probability changing game state (RT state), the stop order of reels for winning the winning combination, the state during AT (assist time) that can notify the stop position, and the RT state and the AT state are: A combined ART (assisted replay time) state can be adopted, but apart from these "gaming states", one of three "game sections" of "normal section", "standby section", and "advantage section". Can be set Going on. In this example, the “standby section” is not set, and any one of the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” is set. Among these, the “advantage section” is positioned as being relatively more advantageous to the player than the other “game sections”. For example, the “gaming state” is an AT state or an ART state. The “advantageous section” is associated with the information. That is, when the “game state” is the AT state or the ART state, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. However, as described later, the setting control of the “game section” is the same as the setting control of the “game state”. Similarly, since the game progress is performed on the main control board side, whether or not the game progress status is relatively advantageous for the player is determined by the lighting / extinguishing status of the advantageous section indicator YH. It can be communicated to the player without lying. As will be described later, if the “advantageous section” continues until reaching a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set. Since the state relating to the AT is also forcibly terminated (information for maintaining the state during the AT is cleared / initialized), the change of the set “game section” affects the transition of the “game state”. It is possible to automatically suppress remarkable increase in gambling due to "game state" such as an AT state and an ART state having relatively high degree of design freedom. It is. As described above, if the “advantageous section” continues until reaching a predetermined upper limit game number (for example, 1500 games), the “normal section” is forcibly set, that is, the “advantageous section” ends. However, the end condition of the “advantageous section” is not limited to this. The termination condition of the “advantageous section” in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is “the push that can acquire the small win with the largest number of payouts among the small wins that constitute the push forward (roll with push forward)”. One execution of the forward navigation (for example, if there are seven, three, and one small wins as the small wins that constitute the push forward, the push forward navigation that can acquire the seven with the largest payout number is not possible. If there is a pushing sequence in which seven or one can be obtained according to the pushing order and a pushing sequence in which three can be obtained according to the pushing sequence, the pushing sequence navigation that can acquire three is referred to here. "Not applicable to the push order navigation)" or "Winning any one of BB, RB, MB", and "arbitrary termination conditions (non-winning (AT) in the 40G1 set loop lottery, fixed 32G (Elapsed time, etc.)) or “advantage section 1500G” is the termination condition. To have. In the case of a specification in which the pressing order bell role does not exist (for example, a specification in which there is a pressing order of replay for shifting the RT state, but there is no small hand in which the number of payouts differs depending on the pressing order), The condition for ending the advantageous section of "one push order navigable to obtain the small combination with the largest payout number" is excluded. Further, in the present embodiment, as the small wins constituting the push order, the small wins include the small win corresponding to the eleventh win and the small win corresponding to the one win, so that “the payout number is the largest "Execution of one push order navigation in which a small role can be acquired" means that a push order in which eleven medals can be acquired (eleven roles can be won) is notified.

<Mechanism for enabling input of game media>
Next, a description will be given of a main part of a mechanism for enabling input of a game medium. The medal insertion slot D170 is an insertion slot for game medals, and the game medals inserted into the insertion slot are guided to the inside of the gaming machine in a medal acceptable state. Further, as sensors for detecting insertion of medals, a reception accepting sensor D10s, a first insertion sensor D20s, and a second insertion sensor D30s are provided inside the gaming machine, and are guided into the gaming machine. When it is determined that a game medal has been normally inserted, the inserted medal can be detected as a betted medal. In addition, the bet button D220 is configured to be operable by a player, and configured to bet a stored medal (a credit medal) by an operation. Further, the settlement button D60 is configured to be operable by the player, and by operation, the stored medal (medal of credit) and / or the betted medal can be paid back to the player. I have. The game medals paid out by operating the settlement button D60 are configured to be paid out to the discharge port D240.

<Mechanism for operating the reel unit>
Next, the start lever D50 is configured to be operable by the player, and is configured to be able to start the operation of the reel by the operation. The stop button D40 includes a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43 that can be operated by the player, and is configured so that the reel operation can be sequentially stopped by operating each stop button. Have been.

<Other mechanisms provided on the front door DU>
Next, main parts of other mechanisms provided in the front door DU will be described with reference to a perspective view showing the internal structure of the spinning-type gaming machine P by opening the front door DU in FIG. The front door DU includes, as a mechanism for enhancing the interest of the game, an effect display device S40 for displaying an effect such as a notice effect or a background effect, and a game effect lamp D26 (not shown) that can be turned on in various lighting modes. Illustrated), a door board D for signal relay, a medal selector DS for detecting inserted medals and the like, a speaker S20 capable of outputting sound, a middle panel (middle decorative panel) which is a member formed of synthetic resin or the like. , An upper panel D130, a lower panel D140, and the like. The effect display device S40 is attached to the upper part on the back side of the front door DU so that a display unit for displaying effects and the like can be visually recognized through a see-through area formed on the upper panel. The decorative lamp unit D150 and the LED lamp unit S10 each have a light emitting source that emits light in accordance with the progress of the game of the spinning-type gaming machine P, and the decorative lamps are provided on the right and left sides of the lower panel D140, respectively. A unit D150 is provided, and an LED lamp unit S10 is provided on each of the right and left sides of the upper panel D130. Further, a door substrate D is attached to the back of the front door DU below the reel window D160. The door substrate D has input signals such as the stop button D40, start lever D50, and settlement button D60 described above. Has a function of a relay board that directly or processes the input signal and outputs it to a main control board M described later. In addition, a medal selector DS, which will be described in detail later, is provided near the door substrate D on the back surface of the front door DU, corresponding to the medal slot D170, for detecting the medal inserted from the medal slot D170 and for simplifying the medal. It has a function of performing proper authentication, guiding an appropriate medal to a hopper H40 described later, and returning an inappropriate medal to a medal tray D230 described later. Further, one speaker S20 is provided on each of the left and right sides below the door substrate D. The middle panel is the upper part of the console, the lower part of the upper panel D130, and the panel part including the above-described reel window. The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 attached to the console D190 described above are used for operations on a menu screen, which will be described later, and a button-stroke effect on the sub-control board S (continuous tapping of the sub-input button SB). This is a member used for performing an effect related to whether or not a bonus is won), a mini game (for example, an effect of success or failure of entering the “AT state”) and the like. Note that the front door DU of the spinning-type gaming machine P can detect a medal tray D230 that receives game medals (or may be simply referred to as medals) discharged from the discharge port D240 and an open / closed state of the front door DU. A door switch D80 is provided. The front door DU is provided with a keyhole D260, and a key (door key) matching the shape of the keyhole D260 is inserted into the keyhole D260 {in addition, by twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise)}. The front door DU can be opened. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an error state (a door opening error or the like) can be released by inserting a door key into the keyhole D260 (in addition to twisting in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise)). I have. A bet button lamp S50 is provided inside the bet button D220. The bet button lamp S50 is configured by an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the bet button lamp S50 is turned on (or blinks). ), It is possible to make the player perceive that the operation of the bet button D220 is effective. Further, a stop button lamp S60 is provided inside the stop button D40 (the stop button lamp S60 is provided for each of the three stop buttons of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Is configured by an LED controlled by the sub-control board S, and the player determines that the operation of the stop button D40 is effective by the presence or absence and / or the lighting color of the stop button lamp S60. Can be perceived. Note that since only the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the valid stop button D40 is illuminated in the lighting color corresponding to the valid stop button D40, for example, the left stop button D41 is invalid. When the middle stop button D42 is valid and the right stop button D43 is valid, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the left stop button D41 is turned off, the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the middle stop button D42 is lit, and the right stop. The stop button lamps S60 corresponding to the button D43 are illuminated, so that the three stop button lamps S60 can be illuminated differently. Further, by changing the lighting color and the lighting mode of the stop button lamp S60 (the lighting color and the lighting speed may be different, or the lighting speed and the flashing speed may be different), the pressing order navigation is executed. The game may be configured so that the player can easily determine the stop button that should be currently stopped, for example, all reels are rotating, and the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is correct ( If the push order bell that has the maximum payout number is won, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button blinks in white, and the stop button lamp corresponding to the middle stop button and the stop corresponding to the right stop button When the button lamp is turned on in blue, and then the player operates the left stop button to stop the left reel, the stop button lamp corresponding to the left stop button is turned off and the middle stop button is turned off. Blink white stop button lamp may be configured so as to light the stop button lamp corresponding to the right stop button blue.

  Next, a back box (also referred to as a cabinet or a base) and each device installed in the back box will be described. A reel unit is attached to substantially the center of the back box so that a part thereof can be visually recognized through a reel window D160. The reel unit includes a reel M50 and a driving source (such as a stepping motor) for the reel M50. Further, the reel M50 includes a left reel M51, a center reel M52, and a right reel M53. Here, each reel part is formed of a synthetic resin or the like, and a plurality of symbols are drawn on the outer periphery of the reel part (on the reel band MO). Then, based on the operation of each stop button of the start lever D50 and the stop button D40, the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel unit are enabled. Although not shown, LEDs (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as reel backlights) are provided inside the left reel M51, the center reel M52, and the right reel M53. Is configured to be visually recognized as if the outer periphery of the reel unit was lit by light transmitted through the reel unit. Above the reel M50, a later-described turn substrate K for driving each of the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) is stored.

  Above the reel M50, a main control board M, which will be described later, which controls the entire game, is stored. To the left of the reel M50, the effect display device S40, the LED lamp unit S10, and the speaker S20 shown in FIG. Stores a sub-control board S, which will be described later, which controls various effects performed using the above-described method. The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value or canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. In FIG. 2, the setting key switch M20 and the setting / reset button M30 are not shown, but may be provided at appropriate positions such as on the main control board M (that is, when the front door DU is opened). If not, it is sufficient if it is provided in a position where human access is difficult).

  Below the reel M50, there are provided a hopper H40 for collecting inserted game medals and a medal payout device H for paying out game medals, and a power supply board for supplying power to the entire spinning-type gaming machine P. E is stored. The game medals paid out from the medal payout device H pass through the coin shooter D90 and are paid out from the outlet D240. In addition, a power switch E10 for turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P is provided on a front surface of the power supply board E (also referred to as a power supply unit E). The details of the medal payout device H will be described later.

<Medal selector DS>
Next, the medal selector DS will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a path (selector) of game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 inside the spinning-type gaming machine P. The medal selector DS is provided with an insertion reception sensor D10s which is a passage of a game medal inserted from the medal insertion port D170 near the door substrate D, and below the insertion reception sensor D10s, a game medal discharge port D240. A coin shooter D90 and the like for guiding the user are provided. The insertion receiving sensor D10s has a function of selecting game medals inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 mainly based on dimensions and accepting only game medals that conform to the standard dimensions, and determines that the game medals are not adapted by this function. The medals (or other foreign substances) are repaid to the discharge port D240 by the blocker D100. If a player inserts a game medal before the player operates the start lever D50 (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is valid), the game medal is selected by the insertion reception sensor D10s, and only the game medal that satisfies the standard is selected. The medals that are thrown into the hopper H40 and do not satisfy the standard pass through the coin shooter D90 and are returned to the discharge port D240. On the other hand, when the game medal is inserted after the start lever D50 is operated (in a state where the insertion of the game medal is not valid), the game medal inserted regardless of whether the standard is satisfied or not. Is returned to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90. A medal insertion sensor, which will be described in detail later, is provided inside the insertion reception sensor D10s (at the back of the flow path). The signal is detected by the second input sensor D30s and supplied to a main control board M described later.

  Next, a sensor related to medal insertion will be described in detail. The game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 first pass through the insertion reception sensor D10s. The insertion receiving sensor D10s is a mechanical double sensor, and when the game medal passes, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down to turn on and the game medal can normally pass through the passage. . Further, with such a configuration, when a foreign substance that is not a game medal (a foreign substance that does not satisfy the standard, for example, a diameter smaller than the game medal) is inserted, the two protruding mechanisms are pressed down. Not done. Such medals cannot pass through the passage because the medals cannot be kept upright (the medals fall down), and are paid back to the outlet D240 through the coin shooter D90 as described above. In addition, the input reception sensor D10s is configured to be able to determine that an error has occurred (as a result, the blocker D100 can be turned off) even when the on time has continued for a predetermined time or more. .

  When the game medal normally passes through the blocker D100, the game medal passes through the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s immediately after passing. These insertion sensors (first insertion sensor D20s and second insertion sensor D30s) are composed of two sensors (arranged adjacent to each other at an interval smaller than the standard diameter of the game medal), and each sensor is turned on. -Various errors can be detected by monitoring the OFF state (the order in which the combination of ON / OFF of the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s changes, etc.) and the ON / OFF time. Is configured.

<Medal payout device H>
Next, the medal payout device H will be described in detail with reference to a front view and a top view of the medal payout device H in FIG. The medal payout device H operates the settlement button when there is a credit (game medal electronically stored inside the gaming machine) or a betted medal (medal inserted for starting a game). It is activated when a game medal is paid out or a prize is paid out. In operation, first, the hopper motor H80 is driven to rotate the disk H50 about the disk rotation axis H50a. By the rotation, the game medals in the medal payout device H flow down from the game medal exit H60 toward the discharge port D240 by displacing the discharge urging means H70. The payout sensors (the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s) are composed of two sensors, and the on / off status of each sensor (the ON / OFF state of the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s). Various errors can be detected by monitoring the transition order of the combination of OFF, etc.) and the ON / OFF time. More specifically, for example, when normally passing through the game medal exit H60, the displacement of the discharge urging means H70 causes the first payout sensor H10s = off and the second payout sensor H20s = off from the state of 1 payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = off → first payout sensor H10s = on / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout The sensor state transitions are as follows: sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = on → first payout sensor H10s = off / second payout sensor H20s = off. Therefore, when a movement contrary to this sensor state transition is detected. , An error can be exemplified.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a list of basic specifications of a spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a prescribed number (the maximum number of gaming medals that can be bet in one game) of three, and the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 each have twenty frames. The winning line is one line of “upper left reel M51, middle middle reel M52, lower right reel M53”. The maximum payout number is 11 and the minimum payout number is 1 (the association between the winning combination and the payout number will be described later). In addition, the priority winning order (pull-in priority order) is “re-gaming role → small role (bell, watermelon, etc.) → bonus”. For example, if the re-gaming role and bonus are simultaneously established, , The symbol combination serving as the re-game combination is stopped and the bonus cannot be won. When the bell and the watermelon are established, when the stop button is pressed at the position where both can be retracted (the position within 4 frames to the stop position for winning), the small winning combination with the larger number of payouts is given priority. It is configured to retract. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and the number of frames on each reel is changed (for example, changed to 21 frames), and the configuration of the effective lines is changed (for example, 5 horizontal 3 lines and 2 diagonal lines). There is no problem if the line is changed to one line of the lower reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. In addition, as a pull-in control when a push order small combination in which a different profit is given to a player depending on the push order is won, a small combination with a large payout number when operated in a predetermined correct answer push order is used. Is controlled so that it is pulled in with priority (number-of-sheets priority control). When operated in the wrong push order different from the correct push order, stop display is possible (the position within 4 frames from the stop operation is displayed). Among the symbols (arranged), a control (a number priority control) for increasing the winning probability (the number of winning combinations is the highest among a plurality of winning combinations) is performed.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a reel arrangement list of a spinning-type gaming machine in the present embodiment. As shown in the drawing, the number of frames of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are all 20 (0 to 19), and the symbols are "black seven", "white seven", and "white seven". Sheep, blank, bell, replay A, replay B, watermelon A, watermelon B, and cherry. Here, “blank” is a symbol included in the symbol combination that constitutes the winning combination like other symbols, and does not mean a symbol that does not constitute the winning combination, but a symbol that constitutes the winning combination that includes “blank”. As a combination, for example, “watermelon B / replay A / blank” is replay 02. Note that the configuration shown in the figure is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the type of the symbol is increased or decreased.

  7 to 9 are symbol combination lists 1 to 3 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol combinations exist for each condition device, and as described later, depending on the stop order and stop position of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, as described later. The one symbol combination is configured to be stopped and displayed on the active line (one line described above). In addition, even when the same type of symbols are not arranged on the activated line, the same symbols are easily arranged in a line on a line other than the activated line when viewed from the player (in the case of a watermelon, the middle stage is arranged). It is configured such that three watermelon designs are aligned on one of the reels, such as aligned horizontally.) Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol combination of a first type BB combination (a so-called type 1 continuous special device according to the so-called first type special combination, but may be simply referred to as a BB combination hereinafter) is used. One type of BB-A (continuous operation of RB-A and the end of payout exceeding 264 sheets) "sheep / sheep / sheep" and one type of BB-B (continuous operation of RB-B, 132 sheets "Black Seven, Black Seven, Black Seven" and "White Seven, White Seven," which are one type of BB-C (continuously operate RB-B and finish with more than 132 cards) It has three symbol combinations with "white seven". In the present embodiment, when the first-type BB combination wins and the BB is executed (the accessory is activated), one BB is executed in all the games in the BB during the execution of the BB. With reference to the lottery table, a winning combination (small role, replay) other than the specialty is configured to be randomly selected (a method in which the table referred to in the case of the role drawing during the execution of one BB is not switched). And may be hereinafter referred to as an all-JACIN type). Note that the format of the first type BB combination is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which a table referred to during a combination lottery can be switched during execution of one BB. When the RT state is “RT1”, when the symbol combination that is the replay game 04 corresponding to the 14th to 16th is stopped and displayed, the system shifts to RT0 (for details of the RT state, refer to FIG. See below). Note that, since “RT0” is a more unfavorable RT state for the player than “RT1”, transition from “RT1” to “RT0” may be referred to as falling. Further, when the symbol combination that is the replay game 05 corresponding to No. 17 is stopped and displayed, "Black Seven" can be stopped and displayed below the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 05 is stopped and displayed, "white seven" may be stopped and displayed below the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (details will be described later). ). Further, when the pushing order bell which is a condition device of “winning-A1” to “winning-A6” described later is won, if the reels are stopped in the pushing order that is most advantageous for the player, the 21st to 27th Are stopped and displayed, and eleven game medals are paid out, while the reels are stopped in a push order different from the push order most advantageous to the player. And the symbol combinations of "winning 08" to "winning 11" corresponding to Nos. 39 to 56 are stopped and displayed, and one game medal is paid out. In the figure, "-" indicates that any symbol may be stopped and displayed. For example, "Bell-Bell" corresponding to No. 23 is an effective line of the left reel M51 and the right reel M53. If the bell is stopped and displayed above, 11 game medals can be obtained regardless of which symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the middle reel M52.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a list of condition devices in the present embodiment. In the figure, the condition device number is referred to as a winning number, and hereinafter, the condition device number may be referred to as a winning number. In the present embodiment, the re-gaming combination is provided from re-gaming-A to re-gaming-D3 (winning numbers 1 to 6). Accordingly, the replaying game to be stopped and displayed may be different. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in the item of “condition device”, which is the rightmost column, a plurality of left reels M51, middle reels M52, and right reels M53 depend on the stop order and stop positions. The type of condition devices can be stopped and displayed, and the condition devices having the same winning number among the plurality of types of condition devices are put together, and the “condition device (name)” in the third column from the right is collected. Are shown in the item of (1). Specifically, for example, in the “re-game-A” which is the condition device corresponding to the winning number 1, the “re-game” is determined according to the stop order and the stop positions of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53. 01, "re-game 02", and "re-game 03". The “condition device (name)” may be simply referred to as a condition device. In addition, a condition device related to re-games such as “re-game 01” may be referred to as a re-game combination, and a condition device in which a game medal is paid out by winning a game such as “prize 01” may be referred to as a small combination. A condition device that starts BB when a stop display such as “one type BB-A” is displayed may be referred to as a BB combination. In addition, when the winning numbers 21 to 23 and 25 to 27 are won, the BB role and the small role are overlapped, and in such a case, the symbol corresponding to the winning small role is stopped. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at positions where they can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the small role is not stopped and the symbol corresponding to the small symbol is stopped and displayed. When the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43 are operated at a position where the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed (can not be retracted), the symbol corresponding to the small combination is not stopped and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the BB combination is displayed. Is configured to stop display. Specifically, for example, in the case of winning the “one type BB-B + winning-C” which is the condition device of the winning number 21, the cherry which is “winning 12” or “winning 13” and the “one type BB” -B "can be stopped and displayed. More specifically, when the reels are stopped in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53, (1) the symbol numbers 0 to 4 (FIG. 6) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing at which the symbol reel No. 4 is located, the symbol No. 4 corresponding to the "winning 12" stops at the upper stage of the left reel M51, and the middle reel M52. Regardless of the stop position of the right reel M53, "winning 12" is stopped and displayed. (2) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 5 to 12 are located at the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "winning 13" is displayed at the upper stage of the left reel M51. No. 6, No. 11, or No. 16 corresponding to the symbol No. 1 stops, and "winning 13" is stopped and displayed irrespective of the stop position of the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. (3-1) When the left stop button D41 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 19 are located at the upper stage of the left reel M51 at the first stop, "1" is displayed at the upper stage of the left reel M51. The symbol number 17 or 19 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops. (3-2) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 14 to 18 are located in the middle stage of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, “1” is displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel M52. The symbol number 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" stops, and then the right stop button D43 is operated at the third stop at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 13 to 17 are located below the right reel M53. In this case, the symbol number 17 corresponding to “1 type BB-B” stops at the lower stage of the right reel M53, and the BB combination is stopped and displayed. (3-3) When the middle stop button D42 is operated at the operation timing in which the symbol numbers 19 to 13 are located in the middle of the middle reel M52 in the second stop, "1" is displayed in the middle of the middle reel M52. The symbol No. 18 corresponding to "seed BB-B" cannot be stopped, and no condition device is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the “role” item shows what role the “condition device (name)” plays, and “normal replay” corresponding to the winning number 1 is in the order of pressing the stop button. Regardless, this is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed, and the “reverse push white 7 replay” corresponding to the winning number 2 is RT regardless of the stop button pressing order. This is a condition device related to the replay in which the replaying game whose state does not shift is stopped and displayed, but the reverse reel (stopping the reel in the order of the right reel M53 → the middle reel M52 → the left reel M51) causes the right reel M53 to be stopped. Stop at the operation timing in which the range of the symbol numbers 18 to 2 of the symbol number, the range of the symbol numbers 9 to 13 of the middle reel M52, and the range of the symbol numbers 5 to 10 of the left reel M51 are located at the lower stage of each reel. Operate buttons And by, the right reel M53, "white Seven" is stopped and displayed in the lower part of the center reel M52 and left reel M51, white Seven has been configured to appear to be aligned in the lower part when viewed from the player. In addition, in the game that was won in the replay game-B and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, by performing an effect of instructing the player to aim for “white seven” by pressing in reverse (the details will be described later), the player was elected in the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect. The "return to black 7 replay" corresponding to the winning number 3 is a condition device related to the replay in which the replay which does not shift to the RT state is stopped and displayed regardless of the pressing order of the stop button. Stopping the reels in the order of the left reel M51 → the middle reel M52 → the right reel M53), the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 19 of the left reel M51, the range of the symbol numbers 14 to 18 of the middle reel M52, and the right reel By operating the stop button at the operation timing in which the range of the symbol numbers 13 to 17 of M53 is located in the lower part of each reel, "black seven" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52 and the right reel M53. Is displayed in a stopped state, and when viewed from the player, black seven appears to be aligned at the bottom. In addition, in the game that was won in the re-game-C and was selected in the AT-additional lottery, by performing an effect of instructing the player to aim for "Black Seven" by pushing forward (details will be described later), the player was elected in the AT-additional lottery. It is configured to be able to notify the player to the effect.

  "RT maintenance RP1 ** (3 choices)" corresponding to the winning number 4 indicates whether the first stop reel is any one of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (any stop button is operated). If the first stop reel is the left reel M51, the replaying game 01, the replaying game 02, or the replaying game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is performed. Is stopped and the first stop reel is the middle reel M52 or the right reel M53, the replay game 04 whose RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. “RT maintenance RP * 1 * (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 5 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any of the stop buttons). ), The replaying game which is stopped and displayed may be different. If the first stopped reel is the middle reel M52, the replaying game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. When the stop reel is the left reel M51 or the right reel M53, the replay game 04 whose RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed. “RT maintenance RP ** 1 (3 choices)” corresponding to the winning number 6 indicates whether the first stop reel is any of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 (by operating any of the stop buttons). Is a condition device in which the replaying game displayed stopped may be different. If the first stop reel is the right reel M53, the replaying game 01 or the replaying game 03 in which the RT state does not shift is stopped and displayed. If the first stop reel is the left reel M51 or the middle reel M52, the replay game 04 whose RT state can shift from "RT1" to "RT0" is stopped and displayed.

  The "push order bell 123" to "push order bell 321" corresponding to the winning numbers 7 to 12 are condition devices in which the winning combination may differ depending on which of the six reel stop orders is selected. For example, “left reel M51: 1, middle reel M52: 2, right reel M53: 3” and “123” are stopped in the order of “left reel M51 → middle reel M52 → right reel M53”. For example, in the case of "winning A-1" (winning number 7), the number of acquired pieces is "123" = stopped in the order of "left → middle → right" (correct answer in the order of pressing). The symbol combination of "winning 01" in which eleven game medals can be obtained is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that “123” and the like in the “push order bell 123” indicate a push order (reel stop order) in which the maximum number of cards acquired in the winning number can be obtained. In addition, when the reels are stopped in a pushing order other than the pushing order in which the maximum number of acquired coins can be acquired, that is, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, one payout is made. In the AT-related state such as the “AT state”, the push order of the replaying game or the bell push order is navigated (the push order that displays the highest profit is displayed on the push order display device D270), and the “normal gaming state” is displayed. , Etc., it is possible to create a plurality of gaming states in which the profit ratio of the player is different from the state in which the pushing order is not navigated. Note that the state regarding the AT will be described later.

  In addition, the “common bell” corresponding to the winning number 13 can acquire 11 game medals, which is the maximum number of wins even if any of the prize 04 to the prize 07 are stopped. This is a condition device that can be acquired, and may be referred to as a bell regardless of the order in which it is pushed. The “watermelon A” corresponding to the winning number 15 is configured such that three watermelons (any of the watermelon A and the watermelon B) are easily aligned in a parallel line. Reference numeral 14 indicates that three watermelons A are arranged in the middle stage of each reel. Further, “watermelon B” corresponding to the winning number 16 is configured such that three watermelons (either watermelon A or watermelon B) are easily aligned on a diagonal line. For example, the 66th prize in FIG. In 16, three watermelons are arranged diagonally downward and to the right like watermelon B on the upper stage of the left reel M51, watermelon B on the middle stage of the middle reel M52, and watermelon A on the lower stage of the right reel M53. The “BB middle weak rare minor role (diagonal bell alignment)” corresponding to the winning number 17 is a condition device capable of aligning three bells on the active line, and will be described in detail later. This is a condition device in which an AT-additional lottery is executed by doing this. The “BB middle strong rare small role (V-shaped bell aligned)” corresponding to the winning number 18 is a condition device in which the bell can be stopped and displayed on the upper left reel M51, the middle middle reel M52, and the upper right reel M53. As will be described in detail later, this is a condition device in which a lottery is added to the AT by winning during BB.

  Next, in the item of “bonus winning information”, numerical values from 0 to 3 are sorted for each winning number. In the present embodiment, a winning number that does not include the bonus (BB combination) has the bonus winning information set to 0, and a winning number that includes one type of BB-A as the winning number that includes the bonus (BB combination) (19) The bonus winning information of the winning number (20 to 23) containing one kind of BB-B, and the bonus winning information of the winning number (24 to 27) containing one kind of BB-C. And By storing the bonus winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information on which BB has been established and which BB combination has been won. The details of the bonus winning information will be described later.

  Next, in the item of "winning / replay winning information", numerical values from 0 to 18 are allocated for each winning number. In the present embodiment, the winning numbers (winning number 0 corresponding to the loss and winning numbers 19, 20, and 24 corresponding to the bonus) that do not include the replaying role and the small role are set to 0 as the winning / replaying winning information. The 1 to 18 prize / replay winning information is distributed for each condition device with respect to the winning number including the replaying role or small winning combination. By storing the winning / replay winning information in the main control board M, it is possible to store information on which replay or small role has been won. The details of the winning / re-game winning information will be described later.

  Next, numerical values from 0 to 11 are sorted for each winning number in the item of “effect group number”. By transmitting the effect group number from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side, the effect to be executed by the sub control board S side can be determined. The details of the effect group number will be described later.

  Next, numerical values from 0 to 13 are sorted for each winning number in the item of the payout group number. The main control board M stores the payout group number, and executes the lottery process related to the AT by using the stored payout group number when performing the lottery related to the AT (for example, the AT lottery, the AT addition lottery). Program and data capacity required for the operation can be reduced. Note that the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery are not executed even if the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won. On the other hand, when the condition device with the payout group number other than 0 is won, the AT lottery or the AT addition lottery can be executed. The details of the payout group number will be described later. In addition, even when the condition device in which the payout group number becomes 0 is won, an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery may be configured to be executed. In such a case, the payout group number may be changed. It is preferable that, when an AT lottery or an AT-addition lottery is executed after the condition apparatus which becomes 0 is won, the lottery result is always lost (non-winning).

  Next, FIG. 11 shows a lottery probability in which a winning number (condition device number, also referred to as a winning role) and a bonus (BB, also referred to as a BB role) for a small role, a replaying role in the present embodiment are determined by the role drawing means. (Also referred to as a winning rate). In the drawing, the winning rate of the winning number is shown.

  First, the lottery probabilities in “RT0”, “RT1”, and “RT2” when the BB is not operating will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate (lottery probability) of a winning combination (especially, a replaying role) can be different depending on the RT state, and the “replaying role” (appearance of all replaying roles in total) Rate) is higher in the case of “RT1” than in the other RT states. Also, "re-game 04" which can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 (a so-called fall re-game player, a symbol corresponding to the re-game player in a situation where it is "RT1" and no bonus is won) When the combination is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to "RT0".) Is mainly won at "RT1", and hardly appears at "RT0". In “RT2”, “re-game 04” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning numbers 4 to 6 may appear, but the RT state does not shift even if “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed. Note that, when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed in “RT1”, the transition to “RT0”, that is, a fall effect that is an effect of notifying that the RT state has fallen (for example, the effect display device S40) May be configured so as not to execute the fall effect when "Replay 04" is stopped and displayed at "RT0". With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the player has won the BB due to the fact that the re-rendering game 04 has been stopped and not displayed, and the falling effect has not been performed. Can be enhanced. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, a sound effect output when “re-game 04” is stopped and displayed and a re-game combination other than “re-game 04” (for example, “re-game 01 ") may be different from the sound effect output when the stop display is performed. With such a configuration, the player recognizes that the" re-game 04 "is stop-displayed. It can be easily configured. In addition, a state related to an AT in which the pushing order navigation does not occur (for example, a “normal game state”, which may be referred to as a non-AT gaming state) and a state related to an AT in which the pushing order navigation can occur (for example, “ AT state ", which may be referred to as an" AT gaming state "). At this time, when a winning number that is likely to shift (fall) from “RT1” to “RT0” is won, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall when in the non-AT gaming state is played. The output may not be performed based on the operation of the start lever D50. This makes it possible to shift the gaming state without making the player realize that there is a possibility of falling to “RT0” in the non-AT gaming state. On the other hand, when in the AT gaming state, a special sound effect indicating that the RT state may fall down is output based on the operation of the start lever (and the re-playing combination in which the RT state does not fall down is stopped and displayed). (Notifying the forward navigation). This allows the player to operate the stop button D40 after the special sound effect is notified, so that the RT state does not fall. The “re-game 05” that can be stopped and displayed at the winning number 2 or 3 (the re-game player who can notify that the player has won the AT addition lottery when stopped and displayed in the AT state) is mainly “RT1”. , And hardly appear in other RT states. The transition of the state relating to the RT state accompanying the stop display of the symbol combination serving as the re-game combination will be described later. Further, as described later, in the present embodiment, the push order navigation for notifying the reel stop order that is most advantageous to the player can be executed by the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40. . Note that there is no problem even if the lottery probability is appropriately changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus is configured to be able to overlap with the small combination, and is overlapped with a part of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, and the cherry. Specifically, the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 are condition devices in which the bonus and the small role overlap.

  In addition, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been activated, the BB role of the winning numbers 20 and 24 (a single role that does not overlap with the small role) In the case of winning the BB role, which may be referred to as a single BB role or a single BB role), the new winning of the BB role becomes invalid, and only the winning of the small role becomes valid. Specifically, for example, when “RT2” is selected and “1 type BB-C” of the winning number 24 is selected in a situation where the 1st type BB-A has been won (carried over), In this case, the type BB-C associated with the winning number 24 becomes invalid. In other words, the situation is the same as the case where the "losing" of the winning number 0 is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Further, in the situation of “RT2”, since the BB has been won and the BB has not been operated, the small role of the winning numbers 21 to 23 and the winning numbers 25 to 27 and the BB role are When the overlapping condition devices are won, the new winning of the BB combination is invalidated, and only the winning of the small combination is valid. Specifically, for example, in a situation where “RT2” is selected and one type of BB-A is won (carry-over), the player is elected to “one type of BB-B + winning-C” of the winning number 21. In this case, the type BB-B associated with the winning number 21 becomes invalid, and only the winning-C becomes valid. That is, the situation is the same as the case where the winning number 14 “winning-C” is won. In addition, the state where the carried over type 1 BB-A is elected is continued. Note that the overlap with the bonus is not limited to the small combination, and may overlap with a part of the replay combination. For example, a part of the replaying combinations of the winning numbers 4 to 6 may overlap with the bonus combination. In this way, by making the bonus overlap with the condition device including the RT shift replay (the replaying game whose RT state can shift), the bonus is also won when the condition device including the RT shift replay is won. There is a possibility that even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed, the bonus will not be denied, so that the player can be expected. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the control is performed so that the RT state does not shift even if the RT shift replay is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player should have transitioned to the RT state (transition to the RT state with a relatively low replay probability) but the replay probability has not become low (frequently won a replay). Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the game, such as the possibility that the bonus has been won.

  Next, the lottery probability in “one type BB-A, B, C” at the time of BB operation will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, during the BB operation, the winning number 13 “common bell”, the winning number 17 “BB middle weak rare small part (oblique bell aligned)”, and the winning number 18 “BB middle strong rare small part” (V-bell alignment) ", and the BB selected in the" AT state "is in operation while the BB is in operation. Alternatively, when the player wins the "BB medium and strong rare small role (V-shaped bell aligned)", an AT-added lottery is executed (details will be described later).

  In the upper part of the figure, the small combination appearance rate when the set value is 1 is illustrated. In the common bell (winning number 13), the appearance rate is uniform regardless of the RT state. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value (six levels in this example). Specifically, the setting number in setting 1 is 3204, the setting number in setting 2 is 3404, the setting number in setting 3 is 3604, the setting number in setting 4 is 3904, the setting number in setting 5 is 4204, and the setting number in setting 6 is Is 4504, and the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate. With such a configuration, for example, when the player proceeds with the game while measuring the number of appearances of the common bell (the number of wins), the player frequently wins the common bell, thereby reducing the number of common bells. The game can be advanced while expecting that the set value is a relatively high set value. Also, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value per game, and the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate. Note that the appearance rate of the common bell is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, depending on the winning of the common bell, an AT lottery, an AT addition lottery, and a high-probability state transition lottery described later are not executed. It is configured not to affect the transition lottery of the state related to (also referred to as the lottery relating to the AT).

  The middle part of the figure is a list of expected values when there is a push order navigation. In the figure, when the push order navigation is executed in a state where the push order navigation can be executed on the push order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 such as the “AT state”, the reels are stopped according to the navigation. The average number of payouts per game (the average number of medals paid out by winning small players, also referred to as the expected number of game media obtained in one game), and the expected medal increase / decrease value per game ( The ratio of the number of paid-out medals to the number of inserted medals in the case of playing with a three-bet bet. When the value is greater than 1, the expected value is positive and the number of medals is increased. The value becomes negative and the number of medals decreases). The average number of payouts per game is calculated as "sum of the number of re-gaming combinations (sum of the numbers of winning numbers 1 to 6) x number of payouts in re-gaming (3) + small role (11) Sum of the numbers (small role appearance rate) of the role (sum of the numbers for the winning numbers 7 to 16) x number of payouts in the small role (11 pieces) (11) / sum of all the numbers (65536) ) "). Further, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game can be calculated as “average payout number per game / medal insertion number per game (three)”. The number of medals inserted per game (the number of game media inserted in one game) is three, and if the average number of payouts per game is greater than 3, the medal increase / decrease per game is expected. The value is configured to be greater than one. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the expected value of increase / decrease of medals per game for "RT1" is relatively largest. Note that the numerical values in the figure do not take into account the increase or decrease of medals due to bonuses. That is, when the game proceeds in a situation where the push order navigation occurs (also referred to as being operated in the optimal operation mode or in the advantageous operation mode), the number of medals increases in “RT1”. It should be noted that although not illustrated in “RT0” and “RT2”, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game is a value smaller than 1 in a situation where no push order navigation has occurred, Will decrease. In the present embodiment, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game is greater than 1 when there is a push order navigation also in “RT0” or “RT2”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Or "RT2", the expected medal increase / decrease value per game when there is a pressing order navigation may be smaller than 1. Note that when the symbol combination serving as the re-game combination is stopped and displayed, the bet number (three) in the previous game is actually automatically bet. However, in calculating the expected medal increase / decrease value in the present embodiment, the medal is expected to be increased. The calculation is performed assuming that three cards are paid out. One game may be referred to as one game.

  The average number of payouts per game in each RT state is 3.511291504 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 4.737915039 when the RT state is “RT1”. Is 3.67137146 when is "RT2". Also, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in each RT state is 1.170430501 when the RT state is “RT0”, and 1.579305031 when the RT state is “RT1”. In the case where is "RT2", it is 1.2237790487, and when there is a push order navigation, the case where the RT state is "RT1" is the most advantageous RT state for the player. The numerical value is a value in the case of setting 1. Note that the winning numbers and bonus lottery probabilities for the small combination and re-game combination described above are merely examples. For example, the expected medal increase / decrease value per game in “RT2” in which BB is being internally established (when there is a push order navigation) May be configured to be less than 1. With such a configuration, in a situation where the push order navigation occurs and when it is “RT2” (when BB is being established internally), if the bonus is not aligned in a game in which the bonus can be aligned, Also, the possession medals gradually decrease, and in the game where the push order navigation occurs and when "RT2" is set (when BB is being established internally), the game can intentionally align the bonuses. By not providing bonuses to the game, it is possible to prevent a strategy in which the number of medals is increased. More specifically, it is preferable to design such that the probability of losing in “RT2” is higher than the winning probability of all the small roles (winning-A1 to winning-I) winning in “RT2”. It is preferable to determine the winning probability of the re-gaming role so that it is designed as follows (the higher the winning probability of the re-gaming role is, the lower the probability of loss will be. It is preferable to design so that it does not become too much). In addition, in "RT2" of the present example, the winning probability obtained by summing up all the small roles is 18784/65536, the winning probability obtained by summing up all the replays is 12501/65536, and the probability of the loss is: 34251/65536 (see FIG. 11), and is designed so that the probability of loss is higher than the winning probability of the sum of all small roles.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the same number 40 is assigned to the appearance rate of the type 1 BB-A for all of the settings 1 to 6. As the appearance rate of one type BB-C, the same number 160 is assigned to all of the settings 1 to 6. On the other hand, as for the appearance rate of one type BB-B, 160 is assigned to setting 1, 180 is assigned to setting 2, 200 is assigned to setting 3, and 200 is assigned to setting 4. 220 is assigned, 240 is assigned to setting 5, and 270 is assigned to setting 6. That is, the numbers assigned to the appearance rates of the type BB-B differ depending on the set value. As described above, the type BB-A and the type BB-C are BBs with no setting difference (the type BB-A and the type BB-C may be referred to as BB without setting difference and BB without setting difference). BB-B functions as a BB having a setting difference (one type BB-B may be referred to as a BB having a setting difference and a bonus having a setting difference). In addition, the appearance rate of one type of BB-A, one type of BB-B, and one type of BB-C is uniform regardless of the RT state ("RT0" and "RT1"). Note that the appearance rates of the type BB-A and the type BB-C (sum) are the same regardless of the set value, but the appearance rates of the type BB-B (sum) differ depending on the set value. In addition, although the appearance rate summed as the appearance rate of one type BB-B is the same even if the set value is different, the appearance rate for each winning number may be different depending on the set value. Even in the case of the configuration, BB-B of one type may be referred to as BB having a setting difference.

  Next, with reference to a block diagram of FIG. 12, an electrical schematic configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a sub-control board S, a door board D, a spinning board K, a power board E, a relay board IN, centering on a main control board M for controlling the progress of a game. A setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, and the like are connected so that data can be exchanged. It should be noted that the solid line in the figure indicates the movement related to data exchange, and the broken line in the figure indicates the power supply route. The power supply route is not limited to this. For example, power may be supplied from the power supply board E to the relay board IN or the door board D without passing through the main control board.

  A main control board (may be referred to as a main control means, a main board, a main control means, a main board, and a main game section) M is a board that controls the progress of the entire game performed in the spinning-type gaming machine P. The main control board M has a main control chip C mounted thereon. The main control chip C has a CPU C100, a built-in ROM C110, a built-in RAMC 120, and the like, which are connected by a bus so as to be able to exchange data with each other. Then, the main control board M receives a signal indicating that the start lever D50 or the like has been operated from the door board D mounted on the front door DU, and receives the sub-control board S, the door board D, and the spinning board. The operation of these various boards is controlled by outputting a control command (or a control signal) toward K or the like. For example, an instruction number (push order number, instruction information, operation information) is directed toward the sub-control board S. ), The sub-control board S can execute the pushing order navigation on the effect display device S40.

  In addition, the sub-control board SC (also referred to as a sub-control unit, a sub-board, a sub-control unit, a sub-board, and a sub-game unit) S is also provided with a sub-control chip SC, similarly to the main control board M described above. The sub-control chip SC includes a CPU SC100, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and is connected to each other by a bus so as to exchange data. The sub-control board S includes various LED lamps S10 (including a bet button lamp S50 and a stop button lamp S60), a speaker S20, an effect display device S40, a torso backlight (also referred to as a back lamp) S30, and the like. Is connected. Here, the torso backlight S30 is a light that is provided inside each of the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53, and illuminates a design drawn on the surface of the reel from the back side. The sub-control board S analyzes the control commands received from the main control board M, and outputs various drive signals to the various LED lamps S10, speakers S20, effect display devices S40, turning backlight S30, etc. Has been directed.

  On the door substrate D, the above-described input receiving sensor D10s, first input sensor D20s, second input sensor D30s, stop button D40 for stopping the rotating reel M50, and start for starting rotation of the reel M50. A lever D50, a payout button D60 for paying out stored game medals (credits) and inserted game medals and terminating the game, and various display panels D70 for displaying game states (not shown). The inserted number display lamp D210, the start lamp D180, the re-game lamp D290, the insertable lamp D300, the special game state display device D250, the payout number display device (push order display device) D270, the credit number display device D200, and the advantageous section A collection of display devices such as a display YH, etc. Door switch for performing further D80, is determined to be incompatible after being turned a medal (or other foreign) blocker D100 like to reimburse the outlet D240 and are connected. The door board D is connected to the main control board M so that data can be exchanged. Therefore, when the start lever D50, the stop button D40, the settlement button D60, and the like provided on the front door DU are operated, a signal relating to the operation is supplied to the main control board M via the door board D. ing. Further, a signal indicating that the insertion receiving sensor D10s has detected the passing of the game medal is also supplied to the main control board M via the door board D.

  In addition, a rotating drum motor K10 for rotating the reel M50, a rotating drum sensor K20 for detecting the rotational position of the reel M50, and the like are connected to the rotating drum substrate K. The rotating body substrate K can stop the reel M50 at the determined stop position by driving the rotating body motor K10 while detecting the rotation position of the reel M50 by the rotating body sensor K20. I have. Further, in the spinning machine of the present embodiment, a so-called stepping motor (sometimes referred to as a stepping motor) is used as the spinning motor K10. In the step motor, 480 steps are set as the number of steps for one rotation of the reel M50. Further, a predetermined number (for example, 20) of symbols are set on each of the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) with a substantially uniform size, and the number of steps is equivalent to one symbol. Is set to 24 steps (= 480/20). It should be noted that there is no problem if the number of steps and the number of symbols per reel are changed.

  The medal payout device H is connected to the main control board M via the relay board IN, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game medals based on a control signal from the main control board M. Perform the operation of issuing. The medal payout device H includes a first payout sensor H10s and a second payout sensor H20s for determining whether or not medals have been normally paid out and measuring the number of paid out game medals, and a disk H50. A hopper motor H80 for rotation is connected.

  The various control boards and the power consumed by the boards are supplied from a power supply board E (a board that controls whether or not power is supplied by a power switch E10). In FIG. 12, the manner in which power is supplied from the power supply board E is indicated by broken-line arrows. As shown in the drawing, power is directly supplied from the power supply board E to the main control board M and the sub-control board S, and various boards (the door board D, the turning body board K, and the relay board IN) are Power is supplied through the main control board M. A predetermined amount (for example, 100 V) of an AC voltage is supplied to the power supply board E, and the power is converted into a DC voltage of a specified voltage, and then supplied to each control board and the board.

  The main control board M has a setting key switch M20 used to execute a setting change device control process (to change a setting), which will be described later, and a setting / reset capable of changing a set value or canceling an error. Button M30 is connected. The main control board M includes a reel control unit that controls the rotation and stop of the reels M50 (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53), and an “AT state” which is a state relating to an AT which is advantageous to the player. AT lottery means for executing an AT transition lottery for transitioning to AT, and an AT-addition lottery for increasing the number of remaining AT games (or the counter value of the AT counter M60), which is the number of games that can stay in the "AT state". AT addition lottery means to be executed.

  Next, FIGS. 13 to 36 are flowcharts showing a flow of a general process performed by the main control board M in the present embodiment.

  The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown by rectangles), judgments (shown by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown by rounded rectangles) indicating start, end, return, and the like. ing. When details are shown in another flowchart among the processing steps, those that refer to the other flowchart are shown as subroutines (shown by rectangles in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of the gaming machine, a gaming machine with a different specification is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a sub-routine executed by the gaming machine with a different specification is included in the processing on the main side. The configuration is such that a subroutine that is not normally used is not left, and a process related to an unused subroutine that is not normally performed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraud.

  First, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing executed for the first time by the CPU C100 of the main control board M after turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P (or at the time of system reset or user reset). . First, in step 1000, after turning on the power of the spinning-type gaming machine P, in step 1002, the CPUC100 of the main control board M executes the initial setting of the timer interrupt (here, the timer interrupt is started. Instead, only the type of timer interrupt is set, and in the subsequent processing, when the timer interrupt is started, a flowchart relating to a timer interrupt processing described later is periodically executed). Next, in step 1004, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes setting of serial communication (setting of speed, data length, data transmission method) and the like as function settings of the main control chip C. Next, in step 1006, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the top address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area. Next, in step 1008, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the RAM area (for example, based on the calculated checksum and the checksum data held in the checksum area, power-off / power-off recovery). It is checked whether the data stored in the built-in RAM C120 is held correctly by the CPU 1), and the power-off recovery data is generated. Next, in step 1010, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the switch state of the setting key switch M20. Next, in step 1014, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the setting key switch M20 is off.

  If Yes in step 1014, in step 1016, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completed flag in the RAM (turns on in step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (step 1006). It is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal with reference to (check result of (1)). If Yes in step 1016, in step 1020, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area in the determined initialization range. Next, in step 1022, the CPU C100 of the main control board M returns the stack pointer based on the data related to the stack pointer saved in the processing at the time of power-off (step 1902). Next, in step 1036, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the inside of the RAM area, and determines whether the data relating to the set value in the RAM area is within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). judge. If Yes in step 1036, in step 1038, the CPU C100 of the main control board M reads the input port. Next, in step 1040, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M starts the timer interrupt set in step 1002. Next, in step 1042, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the power-off processing completed flag, and returns to the power-off processing according to the restored stack pointer.

  If No in step 1016, in step 1024, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a backup error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-returnable error process described later.

  If No in step 1036, in step 1046, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, which is to be displayed on the payout number display device D270) (for example, in the register area). To set). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process described later.

  If No in Step 1014, in Step 1028, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on / off the power-off processing completion flag in the RAM (turns on in Step 1904) and checksums all RAMs (Step 1904). With reference to the result of the check in 1006), it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data in the RAM is normal. If Yes in step 1028, in step 1030, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines and sets the initialization range of the RAM to a predetermined range excluding a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. For example, it is set in the register area), and the process proceeds to step 1034. The range that is not included in the initialization range of the RAM is not limited to the storage area for storing the set value (set value data). The total number of games in the “advantage section” and the total sum of the game sections (advantage section + (Normal section) The number of games, the result of calculating the staying ratio of the "advantageous section", and the like are also ranges that are not included in the initialization range of the RAM. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate and display the ratio of staying in the “advantageous section” in the game (advantageous section ratio). Further, the processing for calculating the advantageous section ratio is configured to calculate at the timing when the unit game ends. The advantageous section ratio is displayed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (for example, displayed on a 4-digit 7-segment display). As a specific display mode, it is repeated at an interval of 5 seconds in the order of “advantageous section ratio → continuous bonus ratio per 6000 games → gain ratio per 6000 games → cumulative continuous bonus ratio → cumulative bonus ratio”. Is displayed. Note that the continuous bonus ratio is "number of payouts in a state where RB is operating / total number of payouts", and the ratio of bonuses is "number of payouts in a state where RB, CB or SB is operating". / Total number of payouts ". On the other hand, if No in step 1028, in step 1032, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the initialization range of the RAM to be a specific range including a storage area for storing set values (set value data) in the RAM. It is set (for example, set in the register area), and the routine goes to Step 1034. Next, in Step 1034, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes initialization of the RAM area within the initialization range determined in Step 1030 or Step 1032. Next, in step 1100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a setting change device control process described later.

  Although not shown, it is preferable that the initial value (the value at the start of processing) of the temporary storage area (RAM area or the like) mounted on the main control board M is not set to the value at which the special game is executed. (In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed due to noise or cheating immediately after the start of the processing of the program). Although not shown, when a random number such as a winning random number is stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, a dedicated storage area is secured and a byte storing information on the random number is stored in a byte. It is preferable that only the information related to the random number be stored (other information such as various timer values is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same one byte, noise may be generated). In order to prevent information related to random numbers from being rewritten).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the setting change device control processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 13, and is also referred to as a setting change mode. First, in step 1102, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1104, the CPU C100 of the main control board M activates a timer interrupt. Next, in step 1106, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value (set value data) in the RAM area is not within the normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If the set values (set value data) are managed in 1 to 6, the RAM needs to be initialized, and a process of returning to “1” when the set value becomes “0” is required. Therefore, in this example, by managing the normal range of the set value (set value data) as 0 to 5, the correction process of the set value (set value data) after the initialization of the RAM is executed (steps 1106 and Step 1108) can be dispensed with, and the processing time can be reduced and the processing capacity can be reduced. In the case of Yes in step 1106, in step 1108, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (for example, 0 = value most disadvantageous for the player) to the set value (set value data), and proceeds to step 1110. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1106, the process proceeds to step 1110. Next, in step 1110, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M displays on the error display LED (for example, the number-of-payouts display device D270) that the setting change device is being operated (for example, “88” that turns on all the segments). Then, the set value is displayed on the set display LED (not shown) (the display of the set value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) held in the RAM), and step 1112 is performed. Move to As described above, the number-of-payouts display device D270 is also used when notifying the pressing order. With such a configuration, for example, when a part of the 7-segment LED is faulty (there is a segment that cannot be turned on), the erroneous information may be reported when reporting the pressing order. possible. In order to prevent such a situation, the number-of-payouts display device D270 makes all the segments “88” light up during the operation of the setting change device, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not the seven segments are out of order. Profit can be prevented. Further, as a configuration related to the display of the set value (set value data), a storage of a set value display RAM for storing data obtained by adding 1 to the set value (set value data) in the storage area for storing the set value It may be configured to have an area and display the set value with reference to the storage area. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1110, processing for transmitting a command indicating that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, in step 1112, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting / reset button M30 has been switched from off to on. In the case of Yes in step 1112, in step 1114, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M adds 1 to the current set value (set value data) (if the added set value (set value data) exceeds 5, , The set value (set value data) becomes 0), and the process proceeds to step 1116. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1112, the process proceeds to step 1116. Next, in step 1116, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the start lever D50 has been switched from off to on. If No in step 1116, the process moves to step 1112, and the process of steps 1112 to 1116 is looped. If Yes in step 1116, in step 1118, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the setting key switch M20 has been switched from on to off. If No in step 1118, the process of step 1118 is looped. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 1118, in step 1120, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays that the operation of the setting change device has been completed on an error display LED (not shown), and turns off the setting display LED (not shown). The display of the set value (set value data) is deleted, and the process proceeds to the game progress control process of step 1200. Although not shown, after executing the processing of step 1120, processing for transmitting a command indicating the end of the setting change mode to the sub-control board S is executed.

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the non-returnable error process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 13 (and called in another flowchart). First, in step 1302, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits an interrupt (hereinafter, a flowchart related to a timer interrupt process described later is not executed). Next, in step 1304, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output port address and the number of output ports. Next, in step 1306, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the output ports (0 to 6, in this example, display outputs to various LEDs and drive outputs to various motors). Next, in step 1308, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the next port output address (by repeating this, the display output to various LEDs and the drive output to various motors are sequentially stopped). Next, in step 1310, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether output to each output port has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the set error display (when executing this processing, some error has occurred), and Are repeated, and a reset signal is input when the power supply voltage decreases, and the process ends. (That is, since it enters an infinite loop, no operation for prompting return is accepted.) If the answer is No in Step 1310, the process proceeds to Step 1306. Note that the processing of steps 1306 to 1310 is a processing of clearing the output to the LED / motor (however, since the external output signal is not cleared, the information regarding the error, the game progress at the time of the error, and the like are displayed on the hall computer side). It is possible to output to).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the game progress control process (first sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a stack pointer (initializes the stack pointer with the start address of the process). Next, in step 1203, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets data in the RAM area required for the game (for example, the maximum number of bets, the activated pay lines, etc.). It should be noted that step 1203 is to clear data used in the previous game (for example, condition device number (winning number), effect group number, instruction information) to clear data ("0" for clearing the RAM address). (Data) in the RAM. The condition device number, the effect group number, the instruction information and the like may not be cleared, and the number selected when the next game is executed may be overwritten. Next, in step 1204, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the RT state (for example, “RT0” or the like) in the game (sets the RT state determined in step 1704 in FIG. 27). Next, in step 1205, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the RT state set in step 1204. The process for setting the RT state may be executed in step 1704 in FIG. In step 1704, a command relating to the RT state (command to the sub side) may be set. Further, when transmitting the RT state to the sub side, it is not necessary to always transmit the RT state, and the RT state may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1206, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a state related to the AT in the game (for example, “AT state”) (steps 1420 and 1429 in FIG. 21, steps 1435 in FIG. The state related to the AT determined in steps 1439 and 1443, and steps 1444-3 and 1444-4 in FIG. 23 is set). Next, in step 1207, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command relating to the state related to the AT set in step 1206 (command to the sub side). Further, the processing for setting the state relating to the AT may be executed in steps 1416 and 1428 in FIG. 21, step 1438 in FIG. 22, and step 1444-1 in FIG. Further, when transmitting the state relating to the AT to the sub side, it is not necessary to transmit the state at all times, and the state relating to the AT may be transmitted to the sub side only when the game section is an “advantageous section”. Next, in step 1208, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section (for example, “advantage section” or the like) in the game (the game section determined in step 3510, step 3516, and step 3520 in FIG. 31). set). Next, in step 1208-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) relating to the game section set in step 1208. Next, in step 1209, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal payout device H is full of game medals. Specifically, a medal auxiliary tank HS (details will be described later) that stores medals overflowing from the medal payout device H is provided, and two full detection electrodes DE (details described later) that can enter the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS. Is determined based on the conduction / non-conduction of the current (when the current is conducted through the medal, it is determined to be full). In the case of Yes in step 1209, the process moves to step 1218.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1209, in step 1210, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). ). Next, in step 1212, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays an error number corresponding to the medal full error using a 7-segment LED (for example, a storage display LED or an acquired number LED). Next, in step 1214, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal full error has been released (for example, the current is not conducted by the two full detection electrodes provided in the medal auxiliary tank HS and the setting / It is determined whether or not the reset button M30 has been pressed. If Yes in step 1214, in step 1216, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the medal full error flag (for example, updates the medal full error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off). Control is passed to 1218. On the other hand, if No in step 1214, the process moves to step 1212. Next, in step 1218, the CPU C100 of the main control board M permits acceptance of medal insertion (in the next game of the replaying game, the insertion operation is automatically executed), and the next processing (step 1220) Processing). Here, in step 1218, an ON process of the blocker D100 (a process of forming a medal channel) is performed. Specifically, when the replaying game is established in the previous game, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is performed on condition that the current number of stored credits (credits) is less than a predetermined value (50 in this example). Execute. In other words, if the current stored number (credit) is the predetermined value, the ON processing of the blocker D100 is not executed. On the other hand, when the re-game combination is not established in the previous game, the ON process of the blocker D100 is uniformly executed. With such a configuration, even if the replaying combination is established, the game medal can be inserted if the stored number (credit) has not reached the predetermined value, such as "RT1". When staying in an RT state (for example, “RT1”) where the probability of winning a replaying game is higher than the RT state, or a replaying game that looks hard to recognize as a replaying game (replaying as a small role: Even when the bell-bell-bell or the symbol combination where the cherry stops on the left reel on the invalid line is stopped, the player can play the game with a good rhythm (without feeling uncomfortable).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (second sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1220, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a game medal has been bet or has not been saved (there is no credit). If Yes in step 1220, in step 1221, the CPU C100 of the main control board M satisfies the set value display condition (for example, the condition is satisfied when the door switch D80 and the setting key switch M20 are all turned on). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1221, in step 1222, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the setting display LED (not shown, but may be the number-of-payouts display device D270, the number-of-credits display device D200, or the number-of-insertions display lamp D210). The value is displayed (moving to the setting confirmation mode), and the process proceeds to step 1221 on condition that the setting key switch M20 is turned off. Processing for transmitting a command to start the setting change mode to the sub-control board S when the transition condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, and setting change mode when the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied. Is executed to transmit a command indicating that the process is terminated. In the case of No at Step 1220 or Step 1221, at Step 1224, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes management related to insertion and settlement of game medals. Next, in step 1225, the CPU C100 of the main control board M checks the number of acceptable game medals. Next, in step 1226, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the blocker D100 is on. If Yes in step 1226, in step 1227, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is on (in the present embodiment, the medal insertion is not performed). It has two insertion sensors for detection, and when the first insertion sensor D20s or the second insertion sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one game medal has been received). If Yes in step 1227, in step 1230, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first input sensor D20s and the second input sensor D30s are off (the first input sensor D20s or the second input sensor). When the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s are turned off after the sensor D30s is turned on, it is determined that one received game medal has passed the first insertion sensor D20s and the second insertion sensor D30s. ). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1231 the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines that the insertion of one normal game medal has been received. Although not shown, after step 1231, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the credit is the maximum number (50 in this example) and the bet number is the maximum number (3 in this example). Is determined, and if the determination is Yes, the blocker D100 is turned off (a state in which the medal flow path is not formed). Note that if No in Step 1230, the process of Step 1230 is repeated, and if No in Step 1226 or Step 1227, the process shifts to Step 1232.

  Next, in step 1232, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the settlement button D60 has been operated. If Yes in step 1232, in step 1233, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether there is a remaining number of credits or a betting game medal. In the case of Yes in step 1233, in step 1234, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag in the RAM area, which is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is driven), and The payout of one medal is executed. Next, in step 1236, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (in the present embodiment, it is necessary to detect the payout of medals). It has two payout sensors, and when the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is turned on, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is performed). In the case of Yes at step 1236, the process moves to step 1247. Although not explicitly shown in the flowchart, if the previous game was a replay, only the remaining number of credits is settled.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1236, in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1234). . Specifically, whether the medals have not been paid out for a predetermined period of time despite the fact that the hopper drive signal is transmitted to the hopper motor H80 (the hopper motor H80 is rotating) is determined. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1241, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area with a value corresponding to on) in step 1242. Next, in step 1244, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a medal empty error display. Next, in step 1245, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). If Yes in step 1245, in step 1246, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and The process proceeds to 1247. On the other hand, if No in step 1245, the process moves to step 1244.

  Next, in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed). If Yes in step 1247, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag in step 1248, and proceeds to step 1233. If the answer is No in Step 1241 or Step 1247, the process proceeds to Step 1236.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1232 or step 1233, in step 1251, the CPUC100 of the main control board M has the start lever D50 valid (for example, a predetermined number of game medals for starting the game have been inserted). It is determined whether or not the start lever D50 has been operated. If Yes in step 1251, in step 1253, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the set value in the RAM area is within a normal range (0 to 5 in this example). If Yes in step 1253, in step 1254, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process of acquiring a random number and turning off the blocker D100, and then proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3600). On the other hand, if No in step 1253, in step 1256, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a set value error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. If the determination in step 1251 is No, the process moves to step 1220.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game progress control processing (third sheet) according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 3600, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an internal lottery execution process described later. Next, in step 1259, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a state in which an AT-added lottery is possible. Here, in this example, the states relating to the ATs in which the AT addition lottery can be executed are “AT in progress state”, “additional specialization state”, “specialization precursor state”, and “advantageous BB state”. In the "advantageous BB inside middle game", the AT counter value may be larger than 0, but the AT addition lottery is not executed. This is to prevent a situation in which the player does not intentionally arrange the BB symbol combinations in the “advantageous BB inside middle game” from becoming more advantageous for the player. In addition, you may comprise so that an AT addition lottery may be performed in "advantageous BB inside middle game", and in such a case, the AT addition lottery is won in "advantageous BB inside middle game". Alternatively, it may be configured not to notify immediately, but to notify that the AT addition lottery has been won at the timing when BB has ended thereafter, or the number of AT remaining games after the number of AT games has been added.

  In the case of Yes in step 1259, in step 1500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an additional game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1400. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1259, the processing shifts to step 1400. In this additional game execution processing, it is possible to execute a lottery using different lottery tables according to the state related to the AT, but the lottery probabilities do not differ depending on the set values (using the same lottery table). It is preferable to execute a lottery). Next, in step 1400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state transition control process described later. Next, in step 1450, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a condition device number management process described later.

  Here, the states related to the AT in this example are listed and described in detail (also shown in the AT state transition diagram of FIG. 30). (1) The “low-probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT (has not obtained the right to shift to the “during-AT state”) and has not been won in the bonus combination. Note that the “low-probability state” is a so-called “normal state”, and thus may be referred to as a “normal state”. (2) “Normal BB inside game” is a state in which the BB role has been won in the “low probability state”, the BB role has not won, and the AT lottery has not been won. (3) The “normal BB state” means that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the “low probability state” in a situation where the BB role is won and the AT lottery is not won. Alternatively, this is a state that is executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the “normal BB inside middle game”. (4) The “high-probability state” is a state in which the player has not won the AT lottery (has not obtained the right to shift to the “AT-in-progress state”) and has not won the bonus role. This is a state in which it is easier to win the AT than in the “low probability state” described above. As will be described later, when a new transition is made to the "high probability state", the system is configured not to transition to the "low probability state" until the number of high security failure games has elapsed. "Is a state in which AT (push order navigation) is performed and the number of remaining AT games (AT counter value) is subtracted. Even if the AT counter value becomes 0, when a continuous lottery described later is won, a predetermined value is set in the AT counter, and the "AT state" is continued (6) The "specialized precursor state" Is a state in which the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" in which the number of AT games is relatively more easily added than in the "in-AT state" is acquired. (7) The “addition specialization state” is a state in which the number of AT games is relatively easily added to the “additional state”. (8) The “advantageous BB inside middle game” means that the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”, and the BB role No prize has been won. (9) The “standby BB inside middle game” is a state in which the BB role has been won in the “low probability state”, the AT lottery has been won by the BB role, and the BB role has not won. . (10) The “advantageous BB state” is a symbol combination that is won as the BB role and corresponds to the BB role in the “high probability state”, the “AT state”, the “specialized precursor state”, or the “additional special state”. The state executed when the stop combination is displayed, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is stopped and displayed in the "advantageous BB inside game", or the BB combination is won in the "low probability state", and , When the BB role has won the AT lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination corresponding to the BB role is stopped and displayed in the "standby BB internal middle game" It is a state that is sometimes executed. (12) "Resurrection availability state" refers to a state relating to an AT which is transferred when the AT counter value becomes 0 and the subsequent lottery described later is not won. In the “state of resurrection possible or not”, a resurrection lottery, which will be described later, is executed. When the resurrection lottery is won, a transition is made to the “AT state” (a predetermined value is set in the AT counter), and the resurrection lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the state shifts to the “low probability state”.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts rotation of all reels, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1261-1. Next, in step 1261-1, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M requests the pull-in point creation (a request is made to determine the stop positions of the rotating left reel M51, middle reel M52, and right reel M53. Or a request is appropriately made in accordance with the stop positions of other reels). If Yes in step 1261-1, in step 1262, the CPUC100 of the main control board M creates a pull-in point, and proceeds to step 1263. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1261-1, the processing shifts to step 1263. As described above, in the “BB inside middle game”, the stop button is not stopped in the pushing order of the correct answer to pay out 11 sheets in the game that is won in the pushing order bell (for example, in the case of the winning-A1) Even when the stop button is not stopped in the order of “left → middle → right” (when the reels are stopped in the order of pushing the wrong answer), the symbol combination for paying out 11 cards by the stop control of the reels may be changed. It is configured to win. Next, in step 1263, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a reel stop acceptability check. Next, in step 1264, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether any of the stop buttons (left stop button D41, middle stop button D42, right stop button D43) has been operated. If Yes in step 1264, in step 1265, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the stop position of the reel corresponding to the operated stop button (for example, the left reel M51 corresponds to the left stop button D41). . On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1264, the process proceeds to step 1266. Next, in step 1266, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a all reel stop check process. Next, in step 1267, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) have stopped. If Yes in step 1267, in step 1268, the CPU C100 of the main control board M compares the symbol stop position data in the RAM with the internal winning combination stopable position data. Next, in step 1269, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal (if the combination does not match the winning enabled combination determined by the internal lottery, the abnormality is abnormal). Is determined). The determination as to whether or not the combination of the displayed symbols is normal in step 1269 is based on whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally, and the winning combination is won. When the stop button is operated in an operation mode in which the winning combination can win the winning game, the actual stopped reel position is not normal (the winning determination determined by the internal lottery is possible). Even if the role does not appear to be stopped from the appearance of the player), if the reel stop control is normally completed by the processing inside the gaming machine, the game medal based on the winning of the winning combination is obtained. Payout is configured to be performed. If Yes in step 1269, the process moves to step 1274. On the other hand, if No in step 1269, in step 1270, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a display determination error display (for example, sets it in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a non-recoverable error process. On the other hand, if No in step 1267, the process moves to step 1261-1.

  Next, in step 1274, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a payout process of a game medal by winning. Next, in step 1275, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a prize for paying out a game medal. The game medal obtained by the winning exceeds the maximum number of credits (50 in this example). In this case, the payout of the game medal is executed. If Yes in step 1275, in step 1276, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on a hopper drive flag (a flag that is turned on when the hopper motor H80 is being driven) and executes payout of one game medal. . Next, in step 1277, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). Then, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal is performed). In the case of Yes at step 1277, the process moves to step 1286.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1277, in step 1279, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper was driven (after the timing of the processing in step 1276). . If Yes in step 1279, in step 1280, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns on the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1281, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the medal empty error display with the 7-segment LED. Next, in step 1282, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the medal empty error has been released (for example, whether or not the setting / reset button M30 has been pressed). In the case of Yes in step 1282, in step 1283, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off the medal empty error flag (for example, updates the medal empty error flag area in the RAM area with a value corresponding to off), and returns to step 1283. The process proceeds to 1286. On the other hand, if No in step 1282, the process moves to step 1281.

  Next, in step 1286, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are off (the first payout sensor H10s or the second payout sensor H20s is on). After that, when the first payout sensor H10s and the second payout sensor H20s are turned off, it is determined that the payout operation of one game medal for which the payout operation has been performed has been completed). If Yes in Step 1286, in Step 1288, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M turns off the hopper drive flag, and proceeds to Step 1290. If the answer is No in Step 1279 or Step 1286, the process proceeds to Step 1277. Next, in Step 1290, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the payout corresponding to the winning (the winning in Step 1275) has been completed. In the case of Yes at step 1290, the process moves to step 3400. If the answer is No in Step 1286, the process proceeds to Step 1277. If the result is No in Step 1275, the process proceeds to Step 3400. If the result is No in Step 1290, the process proceeds to Step 1276.

  Next, in step 3400, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a remaining game number management process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a later-described RT state transition control process. Next, in step 1750, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an AT state start control process described later. Next, in step 3500, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game section shift control process described later. Next, in Step 1293, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a game end process (for example, clearing a bet number, shifting a game state, and the like), and shifts to the next process (the process of Step 1202).

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the internal lottery execution process according to the subroutine of step 3600 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3602, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an internal lottery table (a table that stores winning numbers and numbers to be compared with the obtained random numbers and is used when executing the internal lottery). Then, control goes to a step 3604. Next, in step 3604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires a winning number related to the set internal lottery table address. Note that winning / replay winning information can be generated from the winning number. Also, if the bonus and the small role are duplicated and the bonus and the replaying role are duplicated and won, then both the winning and replaying winning information and the bonus winning information are determined from the winning number. Winning information can be generated. Specific generation processing will be described later. Next, in step 3606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the number of repetitions related to the set internal lottery table address. Here, the number of repetitions is the number of consecutive winning numbers having the same payout group number and the same number for comparison with the obtained random number, and is stored in the ROM of the main control board M in advance. It is remembered. For example, the payout group number 2 includes nine winning numbers of winning numbers 4 to 12, and the numbers are the same for three consecutive winning numbers 4 to 6, which are the push-sequence replaying combinations. Since the numbers are the same for the six consecutive winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the pushing order bell role, the number of repetitions related to the pushing order replaying role is 3, and the pushing order bell The number of repetitions for the role is 6. In addition, the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 4 to 6 that are the push order replaying game and the lottery table used when acquiring the winning numbers 7 to 12 that are the pushing order bell role are a single lottery table. It is configured. Next, in step 3608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the payout group number associated with the set internal lottery table address, and proceeds to step 3610.

  Next, in step 3610, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires the set value data. Next, in step 3612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires designated address data. Next, in step 3614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the internal lottery has been won (whether or not the obtained random number exists in the currently searched internal lottery table). In the case of Yes at step 3614, it is determined that the internal lottery has been won, so that the determination (lottery) is not performed for the subsequent internal lottery table address, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1259). On the other hand, if No in step 3614, in step 3616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M updates the number of repetitions. Next, in step 3618, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a remaining number of repetitions. In the case of Yes at step 3618, the process proceeds to step 3610, and the processing of steps 3610 to 3618 is repeatedly executed until the remaining number of repetitions is exhausted or the internal lottery is won. If No in step 3618, in step 3620, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M updates the internal lottery table address (updates to the address related to the next payout group number), shifts to step 3604, and proceeds to step 3604. Execute the following processing. The specific process of the internal lottery will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the game number addition execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the “in AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number relating to the game to an additional during AT (winning number capable of adding the remaining number of AT games in the “in AT state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not the payout group number (1, 3 in this example) relating to the replay-B, the replay-C, and the winning-D. In the case of Yes at step 1504, the process moves to step 1514. If No in step 1502, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the advantageous BB state, in step 1512, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the payout group number related to the game in the BB additional role (“ In the "advantageous BB state", it is a winning number that can add the remaining number of AT games, and in this example, is a payout group number (5, 6 in this example) related to winning-H, winning-I). Is determined. If Yes in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1514, and if No in step 1512, the process proceeds to step 1518. Further, in the case of No in step 1504, in step 1506, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the state related to the AT is the "additional specialization state". In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M may add the payout group number relating to the game during the specialization additional role (in the “additional specialization state”, the number of remaining AT games and In the “AT state”, the winning number is a number that does not add the remaining AT game number, and in this example, it is a replay game-A, a replay game-D1 to D3, and a win-A1 to A6). (In this example, 2, 13) is determined. If Yes in step 1508, the process moves to step 1514. If the result of step 1506 or 1508 is No, the process moves to step 1518.

  Next, in step 1514, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the number-of-additional-games lottery table at the time of winning and determines the number of AT-added games based on the payout group number relating to the game (for example, in the margin). In the lottery table shown, it is determined whether the latched random number value falls within which range). Determining the number of AT-added games is also referred to as performing AT-added lottery. Next, in step 1516, the CPU C100 of the main control board M adds the determined number of added games to the counter value of the AT counter M60, and sets the AT counter value after the addition in the AT counter M60. Next, in step 1517, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines a command related to the determined number of added games (a command to the sub control board S side, and the sub control board S It is set whether or not the additional number of AT games has been executed and the number of additional games can be recognized), and the routine goes to step 1518. In addition, in the case of the payout group numbers 7 to 11, which are payout group numbers related to the winning numbers (winning numbers 19 to 27) including the bonus, the lottery regarding the AT (AT lottery, AT addition lottery) can be executed. .

  Here, the lottery table shown outside the drawing is an example of a lottery table for additional games at the time of winning, and in the present embodiment, a part of the state related to the AT in which the push order navigation is executed (in this example, “ If the additional role is won at the time of winning in the "AT state", "specialization precursor state", "additional specialization state", "advantageous BB state"), based on the payout group number related to the game, The number of AT-added games is determined by lottery from "0" to "300", and the determined value is added to the counter value of the AT counter M60. If “0” is determined, the number of remaining AT games does not increase (if “0” is determined, the AT addition lottery may be referred to as non-winning).

  The average value (expected value) of the number of AT-added games when the winning combination is won at the time of winning is a value as shown in the figure. As a specific calculation method, the winning combination is watermelon A. In this case, $ (600) × the number of AT-added games (0) + number of (100) × AT-added games (10) + number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + number of ( 24) × AT additional games (100)｝ / total number of games (1024) = 12.1 (game).

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-B or replay-C, the number of placements (500) × the number of AT addition games (0) + the number of placements (200) × the number of AT addition games (50) + The number (300) × the number of AT-added games (100) + the number of ATs (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / the total number of placed numbers (1024) = 46.1 (game). be able to.

  Next, when the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3 and winning-A1 to A6, the number of places (300) × the number of AT-added games (10) + the number of places (600) × The number of AT-added games (30) + the number of placed (124) × the number of AT-added games (50) / the total number of placed (1024) = 26.61 (game). When the winning combination is replay-A or replay-D1 to D3 and winning-A1 to A6, the number of AT games is added only when the state related to AT is “additional specialization state”. Has become.

  Next, when the winning combination is a BB middle weak rare combination, $ (800) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of (100) × AT-added games (10) + (100) ) × the number of AT-added games (30) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (100)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 6.3 (game).

  Next, in the case where the winning combination is a BB middle strong rare role, $ (300) × the number of AT-added games (0) + the number of (300) × AT-added games (30) + (400) ) × the number of AT-added games (50) + the number of set (24) × the number of AT-added games (300)｝ / total number of set (1024) = 35.4 (game).

  In the present embodiment, when the AT addition lottery is executed, the average value of the number of AT addition games may be different depending on the type of the winning combination. The average values are configured not to differ. Here, in a case where the AT addition lottery is configured to be executed based on the winning number, for example, when the same processing is executed as the AT addition lottery with the winning number 7 and the winning number 8, the winning number is 7. Although it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether the number is 8 or 8 as in the present embodiment, by executing the AT addition lottery based on the payout group number, the winning number 7 and the winning number 8 are obtained. When the same process is executed as an AT-addition lottery, it is only necessary to determine whether the payout group number is 2 and to execute the process relating to the AT-addition lottery of either the winning number 7 or the winning number 8. Can be done.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 1518, the CPUC100 of the main control board M may determine the winning number (or winning / replay winning information, or the payout group number) related to the game. ) Determines whether or not the winning number is for replay-B (reverse push white 7 replay, which is a replay in which white seven can be aligned with an invalid line by stopping by reverse push). In the case of Yes in step 1518, in step 1520, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the replay-B has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the replay-B It is determined whether it was not 0. If Yes in step 1520, in step 1522, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M issues a reverse push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and an invalid line by reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). To perform the effect of instructing white seven to be aligned), and the process proceeds to step 1526. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1520, in step 1524, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a command other than the reverse push avoidance command (the command to the sub control board S side and the reverse push (“right → middle → left”)). The order of pressing is instructed, and an effect of preventing white seven from being aligned with the invalid line is executed), and the process proceeds to step 1526. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1518, the processing shifts to step 1526. Next, in step 1526, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the winning number (or the winning / replay winning information or the payout group number or the like) related to the game in the replay-C ( It is determined whether or not it is a replay game, which is a replay in which black seven can be aligned with the inactive line by stopping with forward push, which is a forward push black 7 replay). In the case of Yes in step 1526, in step 1528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of AT games added by the re-game-C has been added, in other words, the number of AT added games by winning the re-game-C is It is determined whether it was not 0. In the case of Yes in step 1528, in step 1530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the forward push instruction command (a command to the sub control board S side, and invalidates the forward push command (“left → middle → right”). Will be executed to instruct the user to align black seven), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1528, in step 1532, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a forward push avoidance command (a command to the sub control board S side, except for forward push (“left → middle → right”)). An instruction to instruct the pressing order and an effect of not aligning the black seven with the invalid line) is set), and the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1400). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400). In the present embodiment, a reverse push instruction command, a reverse push avoidance command, a forward push instruction command, and a forward push avoidance command are transmitted to the sub-control board S. The control board S side is configured to be able to execute the effect related to the push order navigation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the AT addition lottery is won, the fact that the AT addition lottery was won and the number of AT addition games are related. A command (for example, a command related to the number of AT-added games according to the processing in step 1517) is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and when the sub-control board S receives the command, the pressing order navigation is performed on the sub-control board S side. It may be configured to determine the execution timing of the effect and the effect mode. As an example, in the game in which the re-game-B has been won, the sub-control board S selects an effect mode for instructing a reverse push in a game (a game with an additional number of AT games) receiving the command. The game may be configured to be executed, or in the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side, the effect of instructing the reverse pressing is not executed, and a predetermined condition (for example, a specific replaying game (for example, In a game that satisfies (game-B or C)), an effect of instructing a pressing order in which seven sets can be made on an invalid line may be executed. Alternatively, in the game in which the re-game-B has been won and the command is received on the sub-control board S (a game with an additional number of AT games), the effect of instructing a reverse push is not performed, and (For example, after a predetermined number of games (continuous production may be executed at the same time, in that case, the last game of the continuous production), the number of AT games is added to the production (displayed on the production display device S40). This is an effect in which the display relating to the number of remaining AT games is increased, and for example, “+ 30G” may be displayed.) In this example, the effect display device S40 also increases the number of remaining AT games. Such a display is configured to be displayed, and the display may be the same as or different from the number of remaining AT games stored on the main control board side. B won In the game in which the command is received on the sub-control board S side (a game in which the number of AT games is added), an effect of instructing a reverse push is not executed, and a game that satisfies a predetermined condition thereafter is executed. As an example of executing the additional effect in the number of AT games, a case where a special effect (for example, a predetermined continuous effect) for promoting the winning of the bonus is executed on the sub-control board S side (for example, a re-game- B has a low probability of winning (including 0%), so if the player is notified of the pressing order in which seven matches can be made, the player will recognize that no bonus has been won.) The main control board M side wins the AT addition lottery and the sub control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number has been added, (1) AT remaining game After the information is added to the AT and the lottery is performed, the main control board M transmits the information to the sub-control board S to the sub-control board S. Thereafter, the sub-control board S transmits the information about the previously transmitted AT remaining game number and the currently transmitted AT remaining game. The number of AT-added games obtained by the AT-addition lottery is calculated by calculating a difference from the information on the number of AT-added games. (2) A command related to the number of AT-added games obtained as a result of the AT-added lottery on the main control board M is The command is transmitted to the control board S. If the AT addition lottery has not been won, a command indicating that the AT addition lottery has not been won is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, and the sub-control board S side transmits the command. When a command is received, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine an effect mode of an effect related to the push order navigation, for example, a game in which the re-game-B has been won. In the game that received the command on the sub-control board S side (the game in which the number of AT games was not added), the middle press (the middle stop button is operated as the first stop, and the order of pushing to avoid seven sets) May be selected and executed. Note that, although the AT-addition lottery is executed on the main control board M side, the sub-control board S side determines that the AT remaining game number has not been added. After the AT addition lottery, the main control board M side transmits to the sub control board S side. After that, the sub control board S calculates the difference between the information on the remaining number of AT games transmitted last time and the information on the remaining number of AT games transmitted this time, and grasps the number of AT added games won by the AT additional lottery. (If the value obtained by subtracting the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted this time from the information on the number of remaining AT games transmitted last time is 1, it is determined that the AT addition lottery has not been won.) (2) Main control board As a result of the AT addition lottery on the M side, a command relating to the fact that the number of AT addition games is 0 is transmitted to the sub control board S side.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart (first sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is a state related to an AT that can execute the AT lottery. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the AT in which the AT lottery can be executed is only the “high-probability state”, and by winning the BB in the “high-probability state”, the “advantageous BB inside game” Then, when the BB combination wins, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. When the executed BB ends, the state shifts to the “AT state”, and the AT counter stores the initial number of AT games in the AT counter. The value of 50 is set. Even if the player wins the BB in the “low probability state”, the game shifts to the “regular BB internal game” and does not shift to the “AT state” thereafter. It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that when the BB is won in the “normal game state”, the BB combination can be triggered to win the AT lottery. In such a configuration, when the BB is won in the “normal gaming state” and the AT lottery is triggered by the BB combination, the process proceeds to the “advantageous BB internal middle game”, and then the BB is played. By aligning, the state shifts to the “advantageous BB state”. In addition, in a state where the BB is won in the “normal game state” and the BB is not aligned, the game section may be set to the “advantageous section” or the “standby section”. In the case of Yes in step 1402, in step 1404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is an AT lottery role (in this example, a first type BB-A or a first type BB-A, It is determined whether or not the type is BB-C). In this embodiment, the winning number of the BB without setting difference alone (winning number 19, 24) and the winning number (winning number, 25, 26, 27) in which the small BB with no setting difference overlaps with the small winning combination. All of them are AT lottery combinations. If Yes in step 1404, in step 1406, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game to “advantageous BB inside game”, and proceeds to step 1410. Also, in the case of No in step 1402 or 1404, the process proceeds to step 1410. In the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT is different, the AT winning rate (whether the player can win or not win) related to the AT lottery is configured to be different, but when the state related to the AT is the same. Is that even if the set value is different, the AT winning rate related to the AT lottery is the same (when the BB is won in the “high probability state”, the AT is always won regardless of the set value = The state transitions to the “AT-in-progress state”).

  Next, in step 1410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT after the next game has been determined. If Yes in step 1410, in step 1412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the “low probability state”. If Yes in step 1412, in step 1414, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a state promotion combination (a small state that can transition from the “low probability state” to the “high probability state by winning”. In this example, it is determined whether or not it is “Cherry”. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1416, the CPU C100 of the main control board M wins at a predetermined probability (in the present example, it is 1/2, and if there is no difference depending on the set value, there is no problem in changing). A high probability state shift lottery to be executed. Next, in step 1418, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed high probability state transition lottery has been won. If Yes in step 1418, in step 1420, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state regarding the AT after the next game as “high probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430.

  If No in step 1412, in step 1424, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the current state related to the AT is the “high probability state”. If Yes in step 1424, in step 1426, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to 1 (the 10th game since the high security failure final game and the “high probability state”). ) Is determined. If Yes in step 1426, in step 1428, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the low probability transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to the AT is the “high probability state”, the game section is “advantageous section”, and when the game section is “advantageous section”, the pushing order is The configuration is such that the “advantageous section” does not end unless the navigation is executed at least once or the predetermined number of games (1,500 games in this example) “continuation of the advantageous section” is not satisfied (ie, Even if the low-probability state transition lottery is won, the "high-probability state" is configured not to end if the low-probability transition condition is not satisfied because the push order navigation has not been performed one or more times. ). When the BB role is won during the “advantageous section” and the BB is executed, the “advantageous section” can be set at an arbitrary timing even if the push order navigation is not executed once in the “advantageous section”. It may be configured to be able to end. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1429, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1430. Here, the low-probability transition condition is satisfied when the pushing order navigation is executed once. In addition, as the pushing order (winning number where the winning combination differs depending on the reel stop order and the profit rate of the player differs), a combination with a maximum payout number of 8 and a combination with a maximum payout number of 11 are provided. In such a case, the low-probability transition condition may be that the pressing order navigation of the hand with the maximum payout number of 11 having a large maximum payout number is executed once. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1410, step 1414, step 1418, step 1424, step 1426, or step 1428, the processing shifts to step 1430. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state newly shifts to the “high-probability state”, 10 games, which are the high security failure games, are set in the high security failure counter KHc until the counter value becomes 0. Is configured not to transition to the “low probability state”. Note that such a lottery method is merely an example. For example, after shifting to the “high-probability state”, the low-probability state shift lottery is not executed for 10 games (the stay in the “high-probability state” is guaranteed). ), A lottery may be executed to shift from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state” with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20) in each game after the ten games have elapsed. Note that the AT lottery combination (low certainty AT lottery combination, high certainty AT lottery combination) and the status promotion combination have the same winning probability in all set values.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart (second sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1430, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the AT counter M60 is equal to or more than a predetermined value (4 in this example). Here, in the present embodiment, when the state relating to the AT is the “AT state”, when the AT counter value is 4 or more, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 4 or more, the watermelon B In the case where the player has the right to enter the “additional specialization state” with half the probability of winning, and can transition to the “specialization precursor state”, while the state relating to the AT is “the AT state” , When the AT counter value is 3 or less, in other words, when the number of remaining AT games is 3 or less, even if the watermelon B is won, the lottery (specialization) for acquiring the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” (Which may also be referred to as a state transition lottery), and does not transition to the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the AT counter value is 3 or less, a lottery that wins the watermelon B and obtains the right to shift to the “additional specialization state” (both specialization state shift lottery). (May be referred to as "available"), and in such a case, when the AT counter value is 3 or less, the watermelon B is elected and the right to shift to the "additional specialization state" is granted. When the lottery to be won is won, the next game that has won the lottery may be configured to be able to (become to) the “specialization precursor state” or the “additional specialization state”, or the AT counter value May become (specify forewarning state) or (additional specialization state) when (a) becomes a predetermined value (for example, 1 or 0), or a game that has won the lottery After the execution of a predetermined number of games from "specialized precursor state" or " Place may be configured as capable of becoming a specialized state "(which can migrate to). In addition, when shifting to the “additional specialization state”, it is not always necessary to go through the “specialization precursor state”. For example, a configuration is possible in which the “additional specialization state” can be directly shifted from the “AT in progress state” to the “additional specialization state”. May be. In the case of Yes in step 1431, in step 1432, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a special transfer role (a small lottery that can execute a lottery to acquire the right to transfer to the “additional special state”). In this example, it is determined whether or not it is a watermelon B). In the case of Yes in step 1432, in step 1433, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a specialization state transition lottery in which the winning is performed with a predetermined probability (1/2 in this example). Next, in step 1434, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed specialization state transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1434, in step 1435, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to “specialized precursor state”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1431, in step 1436, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 1 (if the AT counter value is 1, the AT final game). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1437, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a continuous lottery in which the winning is performed with a predetermined probability (in this example, 2/3). Next, in step 1438, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the executed continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 1438, in step 1439, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state” and shifts to step 1444-1 (the AT state shiftable condition is set). The number of AT initial games (50 in this example) is set in the AT counter to satisfy the requirement. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1438, in step 1443, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “state for resilience effect production”, and proceeds to step 1444-1. Note that also in the case of No in step 1430, step 1432, step 1434, or step 1436, the processing shifts to step 1444-1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous lottery is executed in the AT final game, and when the continuous lottery is won, the initial value of 50 games is set in the AT counter M60 again. That is, when the addition of the number of AT games is not taken into account, the gaming property is such that the AT of 50 games per set continues to loop in 2/3. Note that the execution timing of the continuous lottery is not limited to the AT final game. For example, the initial game of the AT (the first game that has newly entered the “AT-in-progress state” or the timing after the initial value is set in the AT counter M60) (The first game) may be configured to execute the continuous lottery. With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the next set (AT related to the winning of the continuous lottery) is executed (whether or not the AT is continued) in the “AT state”. The effect during the AT can be made different between when the continuous lottery is won and when the continuous lottery is not won. For example, when the continuous lottery is won, the counter value of the AT counter M60 is used. In one or more situations (during the execution of the AT), it is possible to change the BGM (such as playing a song) or execute an effect in which it is determined that the continuous lottery has been won.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart (third sheet) of the AT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1444-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is a resurrection feasibility effect state. In the case of Yes in step 1444-1, in step 1444-2, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a resurrection combination ("resurrection possible / improper production state") so that the CPUC100 in the next game It is determined whether or not it is a role that can be shifted to the “AT-in-progress state”, in other words, a role that can return the AT. Here, in the present embodiment, the resurrection role is a role that includes any of the watermelon A, the watermelon B, the cherry, and the bonus role (only the BB role without the setting difference, not including the BB role with the setting difference). It is said that when the condition device related to the game becomes a resurrection hand, the resurrection lottery is won. If Yes in step 1444-2, in step 14444-3, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “AT-in-progress state”, and proceeds to step 1445. Here, the AT initial game number (in this example, 50) is set in the AT counter in order to satisfy the AT state transition possible condition. On the other hand, if No in step 1444-2, in step 1444-4, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines the state relating to the AT after the next game to the “low probability state”, and proceeds to step 1445. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1441-1, the process proceeds to step 1445. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the game is the AT final game and the continuous lottery is not won, the state shifts to the “resurrection availability state”, and the resurrection is performed in the “resurrection availability state”. If the lottery can be won, the game shifts to the "AT state" from the next game. Note that the “resurrection availability state” is an “advantaged section”, but the lottery relating to the AT in the “during the AT state” (AT addition lottery, continuous lottery, etc.) is not executed, and the resurrection lottery can be executed. The "state during AT" and the "state for resurrection effect" are different in the manner of executing the lottery regarding the AT.

  Next, in step 1445, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not a state regarding the AT after the next game has been determined. In the case of Yes in step 1445, in step 1446, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the transition condition of the state relating to the AT is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. This is satisfied when 10 games, which are the number of precursor games, are consumed in the “state”. In the case of Yes in step 1446, in step 1447, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a state relating to the AT after the next game, and proceeds to step 1448 (for example, as shown in FIG. If the number of precursor games is exhausted in the precursor state, it is determined to be the "additional specialization state." It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1445 or step 1446, the process proceeds to step 1448. Next, in step 1448, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the high security failure counter value command (in this example, the command to the sub side, the current high security failure counter value, in other words, the high probability state is guaranteed. (The command relating to the number of remaining games being played), and the flow shifts to step 1449-1. Next, in step 1449-1, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state relating to the AT after the next game is determined to be "advantageous BB inside game". In the case of Yes in step 1449-1, in step 14449-2, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc to zero, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1450). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1499-1, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1450).

  In the present embodiment, the AT winning rate is configured to be different depending on the lottery state, and if the player wins the BB role (the BB role without setting difference) in the “low probability state”, the player will win the AT shift lottery. No (after that, the state does not shift to the “AT state”). On the other hand, if the player wins the BB role (the BB role without setting difference) in the “high probability state”, the player wins the AT shift lottery (then, the state changes to the “AT state”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The condition device A, which is a predetermined condition device, is used as an AT lottery combination, and “high probability state A” and “high probability In the case where the condition device A is configured to have the “state B”, if the condition device A is won in the “high-probability state A”, the AT transfer lottery is won in 1/10, and the condition device is selected in the “high-probability state B”. If you win A, it will be AT transfer lottery by 1/2 It may be configured so as to be selected. Note that, when the AT transfer lottery is won, the state shifts to the “AT preparation state” which is the preparation state before the transition to the “AT in progress state” as the state relating to the AT, and then a predetermined termination condition (for example, “AT preparation state”). The state may be changed to the “AT state” when 10 games have passed since the transition to the “state”.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the condition device number management process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1451, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. In the case of Yes in step 1451, in step 1452, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes a command related to winning / re-game winning information (a command on the sub-control board S side, for example, a winning / re-game winning related to the game). Information related command) is set. Next, in step 1454, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines that the condition device related to the game is a role having a pressing order (a condition device having a different winning combination depending on the pressing order, for example, winning-A1). It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1458, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines an instruction number (also referred to as a pressing order number) in the game based on the winning / replay winning information related to the game, and issues the instruction. The number is stored at a RAM address for storing (an address different from the RAM address for displaying the push order navigation). The instruction number is information related to the pressing order, and in this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S (details will be described later). Further, the sub control board S can display the push order navigation on the effect display device S40 by receiving the instruction number. Note that, even when the push order navigation is not performed, the instruction number is determined (although not shown, the instruction number becomes an initial value based on clearing the instruction number). When executing the pressing order game, a predetermined instruction number (for example, AX) dedicated to the pressing order game may be determined. Next, in step 1460, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M executes the push order navigation display on the push order display device D270 based on the instruction number related to the game (display of the push order navigation display on the main control board side). The image is shown in FIG. 34). Next, in step 1466, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the instruction number determined in step 1458 (for example, sets it in the register area), and proceeds to step 1472. (See FIG. 34 for a display image of the push order navigation display on the sub-control board side.) In this example, displaying the stop order of the reels with the highest profit for the player on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 is referred to as displaying the pressing order navigation, displaying the pressing order navigation display, and the like. ing. In this embodiment, the pressing order navigation is displayed based on the instruction number. For example, the pressing order of “left → middle → right” is displayed as “= 1” on the pressing order display device D270. It is configured to display “= 1” in both the push order bell and the push order replay. Note that the present invention is not limited to this. In the game related to the push order bell, the case where the push order navigation of “left → middle → right” is displayed on the push order display device D270 and the case where the game related to the push order replay game is “ The display mode may be different from that in the case of displaying the left-to-middle-right push order navigation on the push order display device D270. That is, the number of types of display modes of the push order navigation displayed on the push order display device D270 may be the same as the number of types of the winning / replay winning information.

  If No in step 1451 or 1454, in step 1468, the CPU C100 of the main control board M performs a mask process on the winning / replay winning information of the game, and stores the masked information in a predetermined address of the RAM. To memorize. Here, when the winning / re-game winning information related to the game is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, if the winning / re-game winning information is recognized due to an improper act, the high profit related to the game is increased. The pressing order (reel stop order) will be recognized. Therefore, in this example, the sub-control board S is executed after performing the masking process {the process of concealing the winning / re-game winning information (particularly the information related to the pressing order)) on the winning / re-game winning information related to the game. , So that it is not possible to recognize a high profit push order. In the present embodiment, as a mask processing method, a plurality of winning / replay winning information (win / replay winning information having the same role is preferable, for example, the RT state shifts according to the pressing order). A plurality of winning / re-game winning information that can be stopped and displayed for the symbol combination serving as a re-game combination is defined as one effect group number (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is defined as the effect group 4). The group number is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. The method of mask processing is not limited to this. For example, after the provided prize / replay winning information (0 to 18 in this example), a new prize / replay after mask processing is performed. You may comprise so that winning information may be provided. Also, in such a case, a plurality of winning / replay winning information out of the existing winning / replay winning information, such as a production group number, is used as one winning / replay winning information as the winning / replay after mask processing. It is desirable to configure so that game winning information is provided (for example, the winning / re-game winning information 4 to 6 is changed to the winning / re-game winning information 19 which is the winning / re-game winning information after mask processing (the newly provided winning-information).・ Replay winning information). If it is determined that the game is to notify operation information (push order navigation) based on the state of the AT on the main control board M, etc., winning / re-game winning information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In a game in which the operation information is not notified, the effect group number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side. In such a configuration, the command related to the instruction number may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, or may not be transmitted.

  Next, in step 1470, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (command to the sub side) related to the effect group number after executing the mask processing (for example, sets the command in the register area). Move to 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a command (a command to the sub side) related to the bonus winning information (the sub side can recognize whether or not the bonus has been won) (for example, (Set in the register area), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1550). In this embodiment, the winning / re-game winning information and the bonus winning information are configured to be derived from the winning number. The deriving method will be described later. Further, as shown in the lower part of the figure, as an example of the display of the push order navigation, in the case of the "AT state", (1) When the fall replaying game is included → The push for which the fall replaying game is not stopped is displayed. The order is navigation, and in the case of (2) bell (1 sheet role / 11 sheet role) → the navigation order is the push order in which the number of payouts is the largest. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game section is the “advantageous section”, the prize and re-game winning information (the type of the winning combination and the most advantageous pushing order for the player) are displayed on the sub-control board S side. ) Or an instruction number (a number that can specify the most advantageous pressing order for the player), while if the game section is a “normal section”, the sub control board S It is configured to transmit the effect group number (a number that can specify only the outline of the winning combination) to the side. That is, in the "advantageous section", the winning / re-game winning information on the game, including the winning / re-game winning information, in which the result of the game and the profit of the player are different depending on the pushing order, are directly transmitted to the sub control board S side. On the other hand, in the game section which is not the "advantage section", the winning / re-game winning information relating to the game is not transmitted, and the result of the game and the profit of the player differ according to the pushing order. In the case of the winning information, the effect group number in which the information related to the pressing order is concealed is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

  In the case where the game section is not the “advantageous section” or the like, when the winning / re-game winning information determined by the main control board M is transmitted to the sub-control board S, the mask processing is executed to determine the effect group number. Then, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board S. The production group number is the winning / replay winning information, and the winning / replay winning information relating to the winning role (for example, a replaying role including a falling replaying role, a pushing order bell, etc.) having the same role. Are grouped and numbers are assigned. Mask processing is performed on the winning / re-game winning information related to the game {processing to keep the winning / re-game winning information (especially, information relating to the pressing order) confidential} and then transmit to the sub-control board S. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which information related to the winning / re-game winning information is recognized due to an improper act, and a pushing order (reel stopping order) that gives a high profit related to the game is recognized.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a reel rotation start preparation process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 (subtraction timer) is 0. Here, the game interval minimum time timer M70 is a time (4.1 seconds in this example) to be secured from a certain game start timing (reel rotation start timing) to the next game start timing (reel rotation start timing). Is a timer for measuring In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUC100 of the main control board M sets a timer value of the game interval minimum time timer M70 to a new minimum time (4.1 seconds in this example) and starts. On the other hand, if No in step 1552, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process. Next, in step 1556, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the reel stop order and the information related to the pressing order related to the ended game. Next, in step 1558, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M clears the information related to the stopped reels related to the ended game and the draw-in point creation request. Next, in step 1560, the CPU C100 of the main control board M initializes the symbol stop position data relating to the ended game. Next, in step 1562, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an output request during a stand-by state for reel rotation related to the game. Next, in step 1564, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a reel control command related to the game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1260). In other words, by the processing of step 1562 and step 1564, it is possible to transmit a command to the sub-control board S to indicate that the reel starts rotating.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the remaining game number management process according to the subroutine of step 3400 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 3402, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Although the details will be described later, the “advantageous section” is one of the game sections, and a situation of the game which is advantageous to the player when the state related to the AT is “the AT state”. It is a game section that is easy to be set at. In the case of Yes in step 3402, in step 3404, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc- 1 (which is a decrement counter and the maximum number of games that can stay in the “advantage section” is 1500 as an initial value). The counter value of a counter which is set as a value and can be decremented for each game in a period which is an “advantage section” is decremented by one.

  Next, in step 3408, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state related to the AT is the “AT-in-progress state”. If Yes in step 3408, in step 3410, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the AT counter value by one. Next, in step 3412, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state regarding the AT is the high probability state. If Yes in step 3412, in step 3414, the CPU C100 of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the high security failure counter KHc by 1, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). Note that also in the case of No in step 3402, step 3408, or step 3412, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1700). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state related to the AT that can be displayed by the push order navigation is the “AT state”, the AT counter value for each game is decremented, but the “advantageous BB state”, When the game is in the advantageous BB internal middle game, the "specialization precursor state" or the "additional specialization state", the AT counter value is not decremented even if the game is executed. In other words, when the state of the AT counter value remains (one or more remains) and the state transitions from the “AT-in-progress state” to the “specialized precursor state”, the “AT-in-progress state” is maintained while the AT counter value is maintained. It is configured to be able to make a transition (transition) from “state” → “specialization precursor state” → “additional specialization state”. It should be noted that even if the state relating to the AT is the “AT state”, it is possible to prevent the AT counter value from being decremented by one when the winning number including the bonus combination is determined in the game. At this time, for example, the display is performed so that the AT counter value stored in the RAM of the main control board M is not subtracted, but the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 controlled by the sub control board S is subtracted. It may be controlled. For example, when the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “30” and the remaining AT remaining game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “30”, the AT counter value is “30”. Is stored or “30 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT addition lottery relating to the game, is displayed on the effect display device S40 when the start lever D50 is operated. “29” may be displayed as the number of remaining AT games, or “29 + α”, which is a value obtained by adding the value “α” obtained by the AT additional lottery (note that “α” obtained by the additional lottery is , Without notifying in the game, a specific game after the game (a game that satisfies a predetermined condition from the start of the bonus game, during the bonus game, at the end of the bonus game, or after the end of the bonus game) May be notified of “α”). Then, the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is also decremented by one for each game in the "advantageous BB internal middle game", and an effect indicating a bonus decision (for example, a bonus decision screen) is output. The remaining number of AT games can be reduced for each game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately knowing the winning of the bonus when the player wins the bonus in a state in which the pushing order navigation such as the “AT state” can be executed. In other words, after the winning number including the bonus combination is determined, a continuous effect over a plurality of games for invoking whether or not the bonus has been won is executed using the effect display device S40 or the like, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Note that the remaining game number of the AT displayed on the effect display device S40 after the bonus game is completed is “30” or a value of “30” or more when notifying the result of winning and adding to the addition of the result of the AT addition lottery. May be controlled to be displayed. When the game is executed and the bonus is won when the AT counter value is “1” and the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is “1”, the game is displayed on the effect display device S40. The display relating to the number of remaining AT games is "0", but while maintaining this state, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games to inspire whether or not a bonus has been won, and the AT counter value is "1". When the remaining AT game number displayed on the effect display device S40 is "1", a winning number (or a winning / re-game winning information or a payout group number) at which a game is executed and an AT-added lottery can be executed. Is won and the AT addition lottery is not won, the number of AT games becomes “0” and the number of AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 becomes “0”. Further, when the number of remaining AT games is small, the probability of executing the continuous effect may be set lower (including 0%) than when the number of remaining AT games is large.

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the RT state transition control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state transition possible condition has been satisfied in the game. Here, in the present embodiment, the RT state transition possible condition includes execution of RAM clear (initialization of RAM), stop display of re-game (in this example, stop display of re-game 04), winning and start of BB -It is configured so that it can be satisfied at the end. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the RT state can be shifted and the RT state after the next game based on the satisfied RT state shiftable condition (the RT state transition in FIG. 28). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1750). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1702, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1750). In the present embodiment, the RT state transition control processing is executed after all reels have been stopped. However, when transitioning to “RT1”, the transition timing may be transitioned when the lever is turned on. The timing at which the RT state is shifted (the RT number is stored in the RAM) can be determined as appropriate.

  Next, FIG. 28 is an RT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, there are four RT states “RT0” to “RT2” and “one kind of BB-A, B, C”, and the RT state is satisfied by satisfying the condition indicated by the arrow in the figure. Will shift. As a specific example of the transition of the RT state, when the RT state is “RT1”, the RAM is initialized, or when the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, the transition is made to “RT0”. The replay game 04 is a stop display, specifically, when the player has won the "replay game-D1" in the situation where the RT state is "RT1" and operated the left stop button as the first stop. , The replays 01 to 03 are stopped and displayed, and “RT1” is maintained as the RT state. On the other hand, in the case where the RT state is “RT1” and the “replay-D1” is won, if the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated as the first stop, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed. , RT state shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”.

  If the RT state is “RT0” or “RT1”, the player wins the BB role and does not win the BB role in the selected game (the condition devices related to the one type BB-A to C-C operate). The RT state shifts to “RT2”. When a BB combination is won at “RT2” (one type of BB-A to C operates), the process shifts to “one type of BB-A, B, C”. Further, when the BB is completed in “one type BB-A, B, C” (the operation of one type BB-A to C is completed), the process shifts to “RT1”. When the state regarding the AT is the “low probability state”, the player wins the BB, and when the BB ends, the RT state shifts to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player. Since the pressing order navigation does not occur, the incorrect pressing order (when the first stop is left button, middle button, right button, One of the three choices is in the correct push order and replays other than replay 04 are stopped and displayed, and two of the three choices are in the incorrect push order and replay 04 is stopped and displayed. By stopping the game, the replay 04 is stopped and displayed, and the game shifts from “RT1” to “RT0”. If the state related to the AT is “high probability state”, “during AT state”, “specialization precursor state” or “additional specialization state”, the BB is won, and if BB ends, the RT state is set. Is shifted to “RT1”, which is highly profitable for the player, and the state related to the AT is a state in which the push order navigation occurs. Even when “Replay-D1 to D3” is won, the replay 04 Navigates in the order in which the correct answers are not stopped and displayed, so that "RT1" can be maintained.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the AT state start control processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition for enabling the transition to the AT state is satisfied in the game. Note that the AT state transition possible conditions include, for example, (1) when the BB without a setting difference that is won in the “high probability state” ends, (2) when the continuous lottery is won, (3) when the resurrection lottery is won Satisfaction if done. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M triggers the new transition to the “AT precursor state” to trigger the number of AT initial games (50 in this example, “50 After the shift to the “state”, the number of games for which the subtraction is started) is set in the AT counter M60, and the flow shifts to step 1756. It should be noted that also in the case of No at step 1752, the process moves to step 1756. Next, in step 1756, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the current state regarding the AT is a high probability state. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the next game is a high probability state. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets the number of high security failure games (10 in this example) in the high security failure counter, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 3500). Transition. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1756 or step 1758, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 3500). In addition, after winning the BB in the "high probability state" and shifting to the "advantageous BB inside game", the BB is won to shift to the "advantageous BB state", and the AT game is executed in the "advantageous BB state". When the number is added, the initial value set in the AT counter exceeds 50 at the time when the BB ends and shifts from the “advantageous BB state” to the “during AT state”. Specifically, when the number of AT games is increased by 30 games in the "advantageous BB state" and then the state is shifted to the "AT state", 80 (initial value 50 + additional 30) is set to the AT counter. become. At this time, when an effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the “advantageous BB state” is performed, the player is notified that the AT initial game number is 80 games at the start of the “AT state”. It is desirable to notify, but as another notification method, the effect of notifying the player that 30 games have been added in the "advantageous BB state" is not performed, and the initial value is used at the start of the "AT state". After presenting a certain 50 games to the player, the player is informed that 30 games have been added during the AT (for example, immediately after the start of the "AT state" or the state where the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 is small). A notification method of performing an effect to notify is also conceivable. By doing so, the player cannot clearly know whether the number of AT games has been added or how many games have been added in the “advantageous BB state”. It is possible to enhance the interest in an additional effect that occurs suddenly for unknown reasons during an AT (a state in which the push order navigation can occur). In this example, the number of AT initial games is set in the AT counter M60 in step 1754, but the execution timing of the process of setting the number of AT initial games is not limited to that of this example. The AT initial game number may be set in the AT counter M60 at the timing of executing the above-described AT state transition control processing in step 1400. Further, the game number (AT initial game number) set in the AT counter M60 is configured to be subtracted from the time when the game after the BB ends (the state relating to the AT becomes the “AT state”). (Don't start subtraction during BB). The counter value of the AT counter M60 is configured to be stored in a storage area of the RAM of the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 30 is an AT state transition diagram in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, “low probability state”, “normal BB internal middle game”, “normal BB state”, “high probability state”, “AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state” , "Advantageous BB inside game", "Advantageous BB state", "Resurrection availability state", there are 10 states related to the AT, and by satisfying the conditions indicated by the arrows in the figure, the ATs are related. The state will transition. For example, when the watermelon B is won in the “AT state” and the special state transition lottery in which the player wins at １ ／ is selected, the state transitions to the “specialization precursor state”. Further, when ten games have elapsed (digested) since the transition to the “specialization precursor state”, the state is shifted to the “additional specialization state”. Note that, as the game section, three low AT states, a normal BB inside game, and a normal BB state are set in the normal section, and the high probability state, the AT The state relating to the seven ATs of “state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, “advantageous BB internal game”, “advantageous BB state”, and “state of whether or not resurrection is possible” is “advantaged section”. Is set. In other words, even if the states relating to the seven ATs that are “advantageous sections” are transitioning (shifting), if 1500 games have elapsed without setting the “normal section”, the “advantageous section” is forcibly terminated. “Normal section” is set. Further, when the notification game state in which the push order navigation is displayed is the “AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed. Also, the gaming state is maintained.

  Note that, as described above, when the state is the "AT state", the counter value of the AT counter M60 is 0, and when the continuous lottery is not won, the state is the "resurrection availability state". When the resurrection lottery is won in the “resurrection availability state”, the state can be returned to the “AT state” again. On the other hand, if the resurrection lottery has not been won in the “resurrection availability state”, the state shifts to the “low probability state”, and the “advantageous section” changes to the “normal section”.

  In the "high probability state", the player wins the BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A or 1 type BB-C), activates the BB without setting difference and ends the "advantageous BB state". ”. Also, when the BB without the setting difference (one type BB-A or the one type BB-C) is won in the “AT state” and the BB without the setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends, “ The state shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”. In addition, when the BB with no setting difference (one type BB-A or one type BB-C) is won in the “resurrection availability state”, the BB without setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Also transitions to the "AT state" (to win the resurrection lottery). In addition, the BB with the setting difference is won in the “state of resurrection possibility production” (one type BB-B), the BB with the setting difference is activated, and when the “advantageous BB state” ends, the BB with the setting difference is alone. If the winning number related to the BB role is the winning number (winning number 20), the state becomes “low probability” after the BB ends (because the BB role does not trigger the resurrection lottery), and the BB with the setting difference is rare. If the winning number is the same as the winning combination (winning numbers 21 to 23), the state becomes “AT in progress” after the BB ends (because the rare winning role triggers the resurrection lottery).

  In addition, in the case of the “advantageous section” and the “high-probability state”, the BB with the setting difference (one type BB-B) is won, the BB with the setting difference is activated, and the “advantageous BB state” ends. Move to the “high probability state”.

  Further, the state regarding the AT to be shifted to after the “advantageous BB state” ends is the state after the BB (the set difference) during the AT (“the AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”). In both the presence BB and the BB without the setting difference), the state shifts to the state relating to the AT at the time of the BB win among the “at the AT state”, the “specialization precursor state”, or the “additional specialization state”, and during the non-AT state ( After the end of the BB without setting difference, which has been won in the "high probability state", the state shifts to the "AT state". In addition, after the BB with the setting difference won during the non-AT (“high probability state”), the state shifts to the “high probability state”.

  The state related to the AT is not limited to the state of the present embodiment. For example, the AT lottery is executed by winning a predetermined winning number in the “low probability state” or the “high probability state”, and the AT lottery is performed. , The game may be shifted to the "precursor state" by passing the game, and may be shifted to the "AT-in-progress state" after the lapse of 16 to 32 games. In such a case, the predetermined condition device The AT lottery is executed by winning, and if the AT lottery is not won, the game shifts to the “bogus sign” state and shifts to the “low-probability state” or the “high-probability state” after 16 to 32 games have elapsed. May be configured. In addition, a “standby section” different from the “advantageous section” and the “normal section” may be provided as a game section. For example, when the game property is such that the AT lottery is executed by winning “cherry”, BB When the "BB + Cherry" wins with the overlap of the cherry and the AT lottery, the state inside the BB until the "BB" of the "BB + Cherry" wins is set as the "standby section". You may. As described above, by providing the “standby section”, the BB is won in the “low-probability state” and the BB is not won in the AT lottery. In the period until the symbol combination of BB is completed (until the advantageous section indicator is turned on) between the case where the lottery has been won and the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off. It is possible to inspire the player whether or not there is. In addition, when the BB is won in the “additional specialization state”, the “additional specialization state” may be configured to restart after the BB ends. An AT addition lottery different from the BB won in the "AT state" is executed as the BB selected in the "addition specialization state" (for example, the AT addition lottery is selected rather than the BB selected in the "AT state"). (The number of games per addition to the number of AT games is relatively large). Further, when the BB is won in the “specialization precursor state”, it may be configured to shift to the “additional specialization state” after the end of the BB, and in the case of such a configuration, during the BB, The AT addition lottery may be configured to be executed in the same manner as the winning BB in the “additional specialization state”.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the game section shift control processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 in FIG. 18 in the present embodiment. First, in the present embodiment, a game section is provided as a section related to the state of the game, and the game section includes a “normal section” that is relatively low in profit for the player and a “normal section” that is relatively low for the player. It has two game sections, “interesting section” which is a profitable section. As a description of the flowchart, first, in step 3508, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the game section related to the game is a “normal section”. If Yes in step 3508, in step 3510, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M determines a game section following the next game to be a game section corresponding to the current AT-related state and the current game state, and proceeds to step 3528. I do. On the other hand, if No in step 3508, in other words, if the game section is an “advantageous section”, in step 3514, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 to 0. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “advantageous section” has reached the maximum number of games that can be continued. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3515, the CPU C100 of the main control board M clears all information related to the AT (the AT counter value becomes 0, and the number of staying games in the “specialized precursor state”). Are also 0). On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not any advantageous section end condition is satisfied. Here, the arbitrary advantageous section end condition is an end condition of the “advantageous section” other than when the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0. For example, the AT counter value is 0. And the push order navigation has been executed a predetermined number of times. If No in step 3518, that is, if an arbitrary advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the flow shifts to step 3515. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “advantage section” ends and the “normal section” is set after the next game, information related to the AT (the number of AT continuous games, the number of remaining AT games, etc.) ) Is cleared, so that the conditions for the subsequent “normal section” to become the “advantageous section” again are not relaxed. It should be noted that the information related to the AT cleared by the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section) includes a counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1, a flag indicating the gaming state, and the like. In addition, these pieces of information are also cleared by the RAM clear at the time of setting change, but depending on the RAM clear at the time of setting change, the "condition device related to the continuous actuation device (BB)" or the "RT state" , The "number of stored sheets" and the like are also cleared, but depending on the processing in step 3515 (processing at the end of the advantageous section), the "condition apparatus related to the continuous actuation device (BB)" or the "RT state" , And the information related to the “number of stored sheets” is not cleared. As described above, the RAM clear range at the time of setting change and the clear range at the end of the “advantageous section” (for example, at the time of executing the processing of step 3515) are different. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the "condition device relating to the continuous actor (BB)" or the "RT state" is held by clearing the RAM when the setting is changed. The addresses in the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantage section” are continuous. In this way, by making the addresses of the range to be cleared at the end of the “advantageous section” continuous, it is possible to clear by a simple process of designating the start address to be cleared during the clearing process and the range of addresses to be cleared. When the “advantageous section” ends, a command indicating that the “advantageous section” has ended is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub-control board S. However, even if the sub-control board S receives the command, the sub-control board S is configured not to delete the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games the “AT state” was executed. ing. However, when the RAM clear at the time of the setting change is executed, the game history such as information indicating that the game is in the “advantageous section” and information on how many games have been executed in the “AT state” on the sub-control board S side. Will also be erased.

  Note that, when the "advantageous section" ends because the counter value of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 has become 0, (1) when the current state related to the AT is the "high probability state" In the next game, the state relating to the AT becomes the “low probability state”. (2) If the current state relating to the AT is “the advantageous BB internal middle game”, the state relating to the AT in the next game becomes “ (3) If the current state related to AT is "advantageous BB state", the state related to AT will be "normal BB state" in the next game. If the state related to the AT is “in AT state”, “specialization precursor state”, “additional specialization state”, or “state for resurrection effect”, the state related to AT in the next game is “low probability”. State (AT For relevant information is cleared).

  Next, in step 3516, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a game section after the next game to a “normal section”. Next, in step 3517, the CPUC100 of the main control board M turns off the advantageous section indicator YH because the “advantageous section” has ended, and proceeds to step 3528. The advantageous section indicator YH is configured to be turned off when the “advantage section” ends and the “normal section” is set. However, the detailed turn-off timing is not limited to the timing of the present embodiment. For example, the advantageous section indicator YH may be turned off when a game medal is inserted in a game in which the “advantage section” ends and the “normal section” ends. In other words, it is sufficient that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned off before the start lever D50 at which the next game can be started is operated. On the other hand, in the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the CPUC100 of the main control board M determines the game section after the next game to be “advantageous section”, and proceeds to step 3528.

  Next, in step 3528, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines to set a new “advantageous section” in the next game (determined to set “advantageous section” from “normal section”). It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 3528, in step 3530, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets a predetermined value to the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1. The predetermined value set in the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 is a fixed numerical value (1500 in this example) common to all set values. Next, in step 3534, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the advantageous section indicator YH, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1293). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3528, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1293). In the present embodiment, the lighting process of the advantageous section indicator YH is executed at the timing of step 3534, but the lighting timing of the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this, and the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH is performed. The timing ranges from the operation timing of the start lever in the game before the new "advantageous section" (the game in the "normal section") to the timing at which game medals can be inserted in the game in the new "interest section" (new " If the game before the "advantageous section" is a game related to the replay, the game is appropriately set during the period until the operation of the start lever in the new "advantageous section" becomes effective. Is also good.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a timer interruption process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in the present embodiment. The processing of the subroutine is started when the timer interrupt is started in the processing of step 1040 or step 1104, and thereafter, for a predetermined time (in this example, T, for example, a time of about 2 ms is set. Is performed at regular intervals.

  First, in step 1602, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a process at the time of starting an interrupt (for example, saving data held in a register in the CPU C100, checking an input port of a power-off detection signal, and the like). Next, in step 1604, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the power interruption is currently detected (in the current interrupt processing). In the case of No at step 1604, at step 1900, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a power-off process described later. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1604, in step 1606, the CPU C100 of the main control board M starts timer measurement (update processing of various timers managed by software). Next, in step 1608, the CPU C100 of the main control board M generates input port data and stores the data (updates the storage area of each input port data in the RAM area). Here, the input port data includes a settlement button D60, a start lever D50, a stop button D40, a door switch D80, a setting key switch M20, a setting / reset button M30, a power-off detection signal, an input receiving sensor D10s, and a first input sensor. D20s, the second input sensor D30s, the first payout sensor H10s, the second payout sensor H20s, and the like (ie, the presence or absence of operation with these operating members and the sensor detection state are sampled at the interrupt interval T). Is done).

  Next, in step 1610, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M refers to the input port data in the RAM area, and turns on / off the door switch flag and the setting key switch flag according to the sampling result of each input port data. Switching (for example, when the switch state of the door switch D80 is continuously on over a plurality of samplings, by turning on the door switch flag, the front door DU is opened without being affected by noise. Can also be detected). Next, in step 6100, the CPU C100 of the main control board M is a processing for controlling the rotation of the reels of all the reels (the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53) (the processing relating to the control of the driving of the reel M50). Will be described later). Next, in step 1612, the CPU C100 of the main control board M refers to the AT counter M60 and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1612, in step 1613, the CPU C100 of the main control board M displays the number of remaining AT games (the number of AT games) on the AT counter value display device D280, and proceeds to step 1614. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. If the AT counter value display device D280 controlled by the main control board M is not provided, the processing of step 1612 and step 1613 is unnecessary. Next, in Step 1614, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data to the output port. Here, the output data is data for driving the reel M50, the blocker D100, and the like. Next, in step 1616, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns off all error flags (not shown, inserted medal backflow error flag, inserted number error flag, inserted medal retention error flag, inserted abnormal error flag, It is determined whether or not all the flags related to errors such as a payout abnormality error flag, a payout medal retention error flag, a door switch flag, and the like are off). In the case of Yes in step 1616, in step 1618, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets an error non-detection command (a command to the sub side and a command indicating that no error is detected) (for example, a register (Set in the area), and the flow proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1616, in step 1620, the CPU C100 of the main control board M sets an error detection command (a command to the sub side, a command relating to the fact that an error is detected) (for example, (Set in the register area), and the flow shifts to step 1622. In step 1620, information on an error (currently occurring error) corresponding to the ON error flag is transmitted to the sub side. Further, the error non-detection command may be set only when the error has been released from the state where the error has occurred (only when it is determined that the flag has been turned off). The information setting process may not be performed (the step 1618 may not be necessary). Further, the error detection command may execute the setting process only when an error has occurred from a state where no error has occurred, or may be performed from a state where a first error (for example, a medal holding error) has occurred. The setting process may be executed when the type of error changes like a second error (for example, a payout medal staying error).

  Next, in step 1622, the CPU C100 of the main control board M transmits a control command (command on the sub side) (for example, if it is set in the register area in step 1618 or step 1620, it is set) Control command is transmitted). Here, as a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board S, a command related to the start lever operation timing (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the first reel stop reception timing (the stop button was operated as the first stop) Immediately following), a command related to the second reel stop reception timing (transmitted immediately after operating the stop button as the second stop), a command related to the third reel stop reception timing (the stop button as the third stop) Transmitted immediately after the operation), transmitted immediately after all the reels stop), a command related to the stop timing of the stop display symbol (transmitted immediately after the stop button is operated as the display symbol stop), winning and re-starting. Commands related to game winning information (sent immediately after operating the start lever (only during the advantageous section)), bonus Commands related to information (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), commands related to the RT state (transmitted from when all reels have stopped until the next game is started), commands related to the state related to the AT (Transmitted from the time when all reels stop until the next game is started), a high security failure counter value command (transmitted immediately after the start lever operation), a command related to the AT remaining game number (all Commands transmitted from the time when the reels are stopped until the next game is started or immediately after the start lever is operated), the commands related to the game section (from the time when all reels are stopped until the next game is started). Sent in between), etc. Next, in step 1624, CPUC100 of main control board M outputs an external terminal signal (a signal for transmitting information from spinning-type gaming machine P to an external hall computer or the like). It should be noted that, although not shown, the information relating to the error output by the external signal includes a door opening error, a closing abnormal error, a dispensing abnormal error, an input receiving sensor staying error, and the like. Note that the door opening error is configured to generate an error when the front door DU is opened and the door switch flag is turned on. The insertion reception sensor staying error is generated when the insertion reception sensor detects a game medal staying. Is configured to generate an error. Next, in step 1626, the CPU C100 of the main control board M outputs the output data of the LED (such as a 7-segment LED lamp) (for example, turns on a predetermined 7-segment LED unit out of a plurality of 7-segment LED units). (A predetermined segment of the segment is lit) (so-called dynamic lighting). Next, in step 1628, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the lighting mode of the LED (for example, changes the lighting color of the LED). Step 1628 may not be performed. Next, in step 1630, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes a soft random number management process (such as a process of updating a random number value managed by software). Next, in step 1632, the CPU C100 of the main control board M acquires internal information register data (the internal information register has an area where an abnormality flag bit is set when an abnormality occurs in the random number generation circuit). . Next, in step 1634, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether or not the frequency of the random number update clock is normal (whether or not an abnormality flag bit indicating the frequency abnormality is not set). Specifically, when the frequency of the random number update clock falls below a predetermined value, an abnormality flag bit is set. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the CPU C100 of the main control board M determines whether the update state of the internal random number is normal (whether or not the abnormality flag bit indicating the update state abnormality is not set). Is determined. If Yes in step 1636, in step 1638, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an interrupt end process, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1602). On the other hand, if No in step 1634 or step 1636, in step 1640, the CPUC 100 of the main control board M sets a built-in random number error display (for example, sets an error number in the register area). Next, in step 1300, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes the above-described unrecoverable error processing.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the torso drive control process according to the subroutine of step 6100 in FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. In this process, the process for one reel is illustrated, but it is supplemented that the processes corresponding to the left reel M51, the middle reel M52, and the right reel M53 are executed. First, in step 6102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a reel rotation start standby state start timing (for example, a timing after execution of the processing of step 1564 in FIG. 25) has been reached. If Yes in step 6102, in step 6104, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to a reel rotation start standby state, and proceeds to step 6106. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6102, the processing shifts to step 6106.

  Next, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the reel acceleration state start timing (the timing at which the reel rotation start standby state ends and the reel acceleration processing is started. (The execution timing of the process). If Yes in step 6106, in step 6108, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6110, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel acceleration process, and proceeds to step 6112. When the reel is stopped, the rotation of the reel is started by this processing. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6106, the processing shifts to step 6112.

  Next, in step 6112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel drive state is a reel acceleration state. In the case of Yes in step 6112, in step 6114, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the end timing of the reel acceleration state (for example, all the interrupt processes for the “number of interrupt executions” in the reel acceleration state in FIG. 35 described later) have been executed. (Timing) is determined. If Yes in step 6114, in step 6116, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state. Next, in step 6118, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel constant speed maintenance process, and proceeds to step 6120. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6112 or step 6114, the processing shifts to step 6120.

  Next, in step 6120, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is the reel constant speed state. In the case of Yes in step 6120, in step 6122, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the reel constant speed state (after executing the processing of step 6116), and then sets the reel sensor to the reel (corresponding to the processing of this subroutine). It is determined whether or not an index provided on the reel to be read is detected. Here, although not shown, each reel is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel, and is used when detecting whether the reel has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel has made one rotation, and the like. Each index is detected by a reel sensor. The signal of the reel sensor is electrically connected to the main control board M. Then, when the reel sensor detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board M, and it is detected that the reel has passed a predetermined position. If Yes in step 6122, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the flow shifts to the processing in step 6130. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 6122, in step 6124, the CPUMC of the main control board M passes a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. If No in step 6124, it is determined that the rotation speed of the reel has become constant, and the flow shifts to the processing in step 6130. As described above, in this example, it is possible to determine whether the reel rotation speed is normally constant by detecting the index by the reel sensor within a predetermined time after the reel drive state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured. In the present example, the predetermined time is a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times (the interrupt processing is configured to be able to rotate 400 steps by the interrupt processing 400 times), and when the reel rotation speed is constant. This is longer than the time required for the reel to make one rotation (one rotation) (for example, one rotation of the reel is 336 steps and the interrupt processing is performed 336 times). With such a configuration, the distance between the index and the reel sensor (the distance from the rotation of the reel to the detection of the index by the reel sensor) at the timing when the reel driving state becomes the constant speed state is long. However, if the reel rotation speed is constant, the reel sensor detects an index within the predetermined time (time value for executing interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. It is configured to be able to.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 6124, in step 6126, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel acceleration state. Next, in step 6128, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a reel re-acceleration process, and proceeds to the process of step 6130. As described above, in this example, when the reel sensor does not detect the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state, The reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6120, the processing shifts to the processing of step 6130. The reel re-acceleration processing does not have to be the same processing as the above-described reel acceleration processing. The reel re-acceleration processing and the reel acceleration processing are performed by interrupt processing for each combination of phases to be excited by the stepping motor and each combination of phases to be excited. May be made different.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reel rotation stop processing according to the subroutine of step 6200 in FIG. 32 in the present embodiment. First, in step 6106, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the reel deceleration standby state start timing (the timing at which the reel constant speed state ends, for example, the reel deceleration standby state start timing by operating the stop button). Is determined). If Yes in step 6130, in step 6132, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration standby state, and proceeds to step 6134. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 6130, the processing shifts to step 6134.

  Next, in step 6134, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration standby state. In the case of Yes in step 6136, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration standby state end timing (the timing to start executing the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6136, in step 6138, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts reel deceleration (reel deceleration processing). Next, in step 6140, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel deceleration state, and proceeds to the processing in step 6142. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6134 or step 6136, the processing shifts to step 6142.

  Next, in step 6142, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the current reel driving state is a reel deceleration state. If Yes in step 6142, in step 6144, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the reel deceleration state end timing (timing to end the execution of the reel deceleration process) has been reached. If Yes in step 6144, in step 6146, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the reel driving state to the reel stopped state, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1612). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 6142 or 6144, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1612).

  Next, the rotation operation of the reel M50 of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment starts the rotation of the stepping motor based on the operation of the start lever D50, and when the rotation speed of the reel reaches a constant speed, maintains the constant speed thereafter (reel). When the drive state becomes the reel constant speed state, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, but the rotation speed may not actually reach the constant speed in some cases). When one of the stop buttons is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop button. Here, the stepping motor is a four-phase stepping motor having four phases Φ0, Φ1, Φ2, and Φ3 (there is no problem if it is not a four-phase stepping motor). Rotation control is performed by phase excitation. That is, by cyclically changing the drive pulse data (combination of phases to be excited), the stepping motor can be rotated in the forward direction. In the figure, one of the phases Φ0 to Φ3, which indicates which phase is to be excited, is shown in the column of “Phase to Excite” (details will be described later).

  Further, as shown in the “reel rotation speed image” at the top of the figure, the driving state from the start of rotation to the stop of the stepping motor is divided into six, and the stepping motor is driven according to a driving pattern corresponding to each driving state. Drive control. Here, the driving state includes a "reel stopped state", a "reel rotation start standby state", a "reel acceleration state", a "reel constant speed state", a "reel deceleration standby state", and a "reel deceleration state". In the “reel rotation speed image”, the vertical axis indicates the reel rotation speed, and the speed increases in the upward direction, and the horizontal axis indicates time, and the time elapses in the right direction. I have. Also, the example shown in the figure illustrates a case where the reel rotation failure did not occur, and this limit applies when the reel rotation failure occurs due to factors such as holding the reel by hand or occurrence of step-out. This is not the case (reel rotation failure will be described later).

  The “reel stopped state” indicates a state in which the reel is stopped. When the reel is in the “reel stopped state”, the reel is in a stationary state and all four phases of the stepping motor are in a stopped state. Are not excited.

  Next, in the “reel stopped state”, the reel drive state is updated to the “reel rotation start standby state” based on the operation of the start lever D50 at the timing (1) in the drawing. . Here, the “reel rotation start standby state” indicates a state in which the operation waits until the acceleration processing of the stepping motor (reel acceleration processing) is started after the start lever D50 is operated. This standby period is a period until the reel driving state shifts from the “reel stopped state” to the “reel acceleration state”. For example, the time from when the reel driving state becomes the “reel acceleration state” in the previous game is counted, and the start lever D50 related to the current game is operated before the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) elapses. In this case, a "reel rotation start standby state" is entered.

  Next, at the timing (2) in the drawing, the reel driving state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state”. Here, the “reel acceleration state” is a state in which the reel is accelerating to reach a constant speed from a state in which the reel is stationary. In this example, if the timer interrupt processing is executed 220 times (“100 + 60 + 30 + 15 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 220”, and refer to the number of interrupts executed in the reel acceleration state at the lower left of FIG. 9), the acceleration state ends (the reel driving state is changed to “reel constant speed”). State). Next, at the timing (3) in the drawing, in other words, at the timing when the “reel acceleration state” ends by executing one more timer interrupt process, the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed. Note that, at this timing, the reel driving state remains in the “reel acceleration state”. Next, at the timing (4) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the “reel rotation start standby state” to the “reel acceleration state” and the timer interrupt processing is executed 220 times. The state is updated to “reel constant speed state”. As described above, in this example, after the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed, the reel drive state remains in the “reel acceleration state” for one timer interrupt process, in other words, the final state in the “reel acceleration state” "Φ3, φ0", which is a combination of phases to be excited, is configured to execute interrupt processing only once, similar to the "reel constant speed state" in which interrupt processing is executed once for each combination of phases to be excited. (When no reel rotation abnormality occurs). With this configuration, it is possible to stably execute the acceleration processing until the reel rotation speed reaches the constant speed.

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a “step motor excitation image”. FIG. 3 illustrates a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel acceleration state” and a step motor excitation image when the reel driving state is the “reel constant speed state”. First, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel acceleration state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower left part of FIG. The “phase to be excited” is a combination of the phases to be excited, and the “interrupt execution count” indicates the number of times of executing the interrupt processing to be excited by the combination of the phases to be excited. In this example, when the reel acceleration process is executed, the step motor (stepping motor) is configured to be excited by the timer interrupt process 220 times, and the interrupt process is performed 100 times in (KA) “φ0” → ( KB) Interrupt processing is performed 60 times at “φ0, φ1” → (KC) Interrupt processing is performed 30 times at “φ1” → (KD) Interrupt processing is performed 15 times at “φ1, φ2” → (KE) “φ2” 8 times interrupt processing → (KF) 4 times interrupt processing with “φ2, φ3” → (KG) 2 times interrupt processing with “φ3” → (KH) Interruption with “φ3, φ0” It is configured to execute an interrupt process as in the process once to excite the step motor (stepping motor) (the number of times the interrupt process is executed is only an example, and there is no problem if it is changed). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reel acceleration processing is executed, the number of times of executing the interruption processing with one combination of the phases to be excited is gradually reduced.

  Next, the step motor excitation image when the reel drive state is the “reel constant speed state” will be described in detail with reference to the lower right part of FIG. In this example, when the reel is in the constant-speed state (when the reel constant-speed maintaining processing is executed), the interrupt processing is performed once at (TA) “φ0” → (TB) at “φ0, φ1”. Interrupt processing once → (TC) Interrupt processing once with “φ1” → (TD) Interrupt processing once with “φ1, φ2” → (TE) Interrupt processing once with “φ2” → (TF) Interrupt processing once at “φ2, φ3” → (TG) Interrupt processing once at “φ3” → (TH) Interrupt processing once at “φ3, φ0” → (TA) “ Interrupt processing is performed once at φ0 → (TB) Interrupt processing is performed once at “φ0, φ1” →... To excite a stepping motor (stepping motor). As described above, in the present example, when the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed, the number of times of executing the interrupt process in one combination of the phases to be excited is all one.

  Next, in the situation where the reel drive state is the "reel constant speed state", the stop button corresponding to any one of the reels is operated at the timing (5) in the drawing, and the reel drive state becomes the "reel deceleration standby state". "Is updated. Here, the “reel constant speed state” is a state in which the rotation speed of the reel is constant (a state in which the combination of the phases to be excited is switched for each interruption process), and a “reel deceleration standby state”. Indicates a state from the time when the stop button is operated by the player to the time when the stop control is started (in the reel deceleration standby state, the slip of the reel corresponding to the number of slip frames has occurred). . The period of this driving state is determined based on the operation timing of the stop button.

  Next, at the timing (6) in the figure, the reel drive state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", and the reels are started to decelerate. When the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration standby state" to the "reel deceleration state", a specific phase of the stepping motor is continuously excited for a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel. Four-phase excitation for exciting all is performed. When the excitation is performed for a predetermined time, the reel driving state is updated from the "reel deceleration state" to the "reel stop state" at the timing (7) in the drawing, and the reel stops.

  As described above, in the spinning machine according to the present example, the reel sensor detects the index within a predetermined time (for example, a time value for executing the interrupt processing 400 times) after the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. If not, the reel drive state is updated to the reel acceleration state again, and the reel re-acceleration processing (the excitation mode of the stepping motor is the same as the reel acceleration processing) is executed. When the reel drive state is the reel acceleration state, in other words, during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, it is not determined whether or not the reel has been normally accelerated. The processing in step 6124 (the reel driving state is changed to the constant reel speed state) is to determine whether the acceleration of the reel is normally performed, in other words, whether the reel is at a constant speed (whether the reel rotation failure is not occurring). The determination is made after a predetermined time has elapsed from the update. However, in the processing of step 6124, the reels are not at a constant speed because the reel sensor did not detect the index (reel rotation failure occurs). When it is determined that the reel acceleration has occurred, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed, that is, the reel acceleration processing is executed again from the beginning. In this way, by not configuring whether the reel acceleration has been performed normally during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, even if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, If the rotation speed of the reel can reach the constant speed by the remaining reel acceleration processing until the reel rotation failure is eliminated and the reel acceleration processing is completed, the reel driving state becomes the reel constant speed state. When the reel sensor detects the index before the predetermined time elapses after the update, the reel constant speed maintaining process is executed without executing the re-acceleration process. , The game cannot proceed (the stop button cannot be operated). In addition, during the execution of the reel acceleration process, by not executing the process of determining whether or not the reel has been normally accelerated, the data amount required for the process related to the rotation of the reel can be reduced. In addition, since the reel-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured as described above, if a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the following operations are performed. It becomes.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Executes reel acceleration processing → Ends reel acceleration processing → Updates reel drive state to reel constant speed state → Executes reel constant speed maintenance processing → Reels constant Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of the speed maintaining processing → reel rotation failure is detected → reel re-acceleration processing is executed.
In addition, the reel rotation failure means that the rotation of the reel is hindered by a member provided near the reel such as the reel window D160 (the reel rubs against the reel window D160), or the reel is accelerated due to loss of synchronism. Is not executed normally. As described above, by executing the reel re-acceleration processing even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel constant speed maintaining processing, the game can proceed smoothly.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Executes reel acceleration processing → Reel rotation failure occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Continues reel acceleration processing → Ends execution of reel acceleration processing → Update the reel driving state to the reel constant speed state → Execute the reel constant speed maintaining processing → Detect the reel rotation failure → Execute the reel re-acceleration processing It is configured to be able to operate as described above. As described above, even when a reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of the reel acceleration processing, the reel re-acceleration processing is executed when the reel rotation failure is detected, so that the game can smoothly proceed. Can be done.

<Action 3>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to reel acceleration state → Executes reel acceleration processing → Power supply interruption occurs during execution of reel acceleration processing → Recovers from power supply interruption → Continues reel acceleration processing (not processed Reel acceleration processing) → Reel rotation failure occurs during the execution of reel acceleration processing → Continue reel acceleration processing (execute unprocessed reel acceleration processing) → End of reel acceleration processing → Reel driving state Is updated to the reel constant speed state → reel constant speed maintaining processing is executed → reel rotation failure is detected → reel reacceleration processing is executed. As described above, even when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously performed after the power is restored, and thereafter, the reel drive state is updated to the reel constant speed state within a predetermined time. By executing the reel re-acceleration process when the reel sensor does not detect the index, the game can be smoothly advanced. In addition, when the power is cut off during the execution of the reel acceleration process, the reel acceleration process is continuously performed after the power is restored, and then the reel sensor is updated within a predetermined time after the reel driving state is updated to the reel constant speed state. Is configured not to execute the reel re-acceleration processing when an index is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot proceed with the game due to the reel re-acceleration processing (the stop button cannot be operated). It can be hardly generated.

<< Action after final stop button operation >>
In the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, the final reel (the reel that rotates to the end, also referred to as the third reel) stops after the final stop button (third stop button) is operated, and the winning combination is established. Although the payout of the game medals is configured to be executed when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the operation related to the payout of the game medals may be configured as follows.

<Action 1>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as stop operation of first reel → First reel Is a stop display → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stop → operation of a third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel Update drive state to reel deceleration state → Power cut-off → Move third reel to stop display position (rotation) → Detect power cut-off → Execute power-off processing → Power-on → Symbol corresponding to winning combination on reel The combination may be configured to perform a process related to stop display → payout of game medals as described above. With this configuration, in a game such as the above-described common bell, which can win a win regardless of the operation timing of the stop button in the case of winning, a stop operation of the third stop button is received. Immediately after the power failure due to a power outage of the game hall, etc., regardless of the expected stop position of the third reel (even when the number of sliding frames is the maximum), The movement (rotation) to the expected stop position can be configured to be completed. Further, when the symbol combination (for example, the common bell) constituting the winning combination is stopped and displayed after the return of the power supply, the payout of the game medals can be normally executed, and the disadvantage is hardly generated for the player. Can be configured.

<Action 2>
Reel rotation starts → Updates reel drive state to constant speed state → Executes constant speed state maintenance processing → Accepts stop button → Operates first stop button as first reel stop operation → First reel Is displayed as a stop → operation of the second stop button as a stop operation of the second reel → display of the second reel is stopped → operation of the third stop button as a stop operation of the third reel (accepts the operation of the third stop button) → reel Update the driving state to the reel deceleration state → Reel rotation failure occurs → The third reel cannot move (rotate) to the expected stop position as viewed from the player → The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stops on the reel as viewed from the player Although not displayed, the symbol combination is determined to be normal in the determination processing of step 1269 (when it is determined that the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop button has been completed normally) For example, in the game in which the bell role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role, which is a winning combination, was not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, but the stop button was operated by the player. When the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination is normally executed by the processing inside the gaming machine) → The processing relating to the payout of the game medals may be executed. With this configuration, even when a reel rotation failure occurs immediately after the stop operation of the third stop button is received, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped and displayed on the reel as viewed from the player, In the internal processing of the gaming machine, the winning button is won, and the operation of the stop button corresponding to each reel (left reel, middle reel, right reel) is received at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped and displayed. If the stop control for stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is normally executed, the payout of the game medal can be executed, and the disadvantage is not easily generated for the player. can do.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the power-off process according to the subroutine of step 1900 in FIG. First, in step 1902, the CPU C100 of the main control board M stores the stack pointer. Next, in step 1904, the CPU C100 of the main control board M turns on the power-off processing completed flag (for example, updates the power-off processed flag area of the RAM area with a value corresponding to on). Next, in step 1906, the CPU C100 of the main control board M calculates the checksum from the start address of the RAM area to the address immediately before the checksum area, and detects error detection information based on the calculated checksum (for example, The lower one byte of the obtained checksum or its complement is set in the checksum area. Next, in step 1912, the CPU C100 of the main control board M prohibits writing into the RAM, and proceeds to step 1914. Next, in step 1914, the CPU C100 of the main control board M executes an infinite loop process for waiting for reset.

  Next, FIG. 37 shows an example of an image diagram of a pressing order display of the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example. The table on the drawing shows the reel stop order and the instruction number indicated by the executed push order navigation (information related to the push order. In this example, the main control board M is determined and transmitted to the sub control board S). It is a table | surface which shows correspondence with. For example, the instruction number for notifying “middle → right → left” as the pressing order is “A5”. Next, on the left side of the figure, when the pressing order is “left → center → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A1”), the pressing order display device D270, the advantageous section display YH, and the effect display device S40. FIG. Here, the pressing order display device D270 of this example is a 7-segment display method, and also serves as a payout number display device. When the payout of medals is executed, the number of paid out medals is displayed as a two-digit number on the pressing order display device D270. Here, even when the push order navigation is executed, if the display of the push order display device D270 is displayed as a two-digit numerical value, whether the display on the push order display device D270 is the number of medals paid out or the push order It is difficult to determine whether the display is the navigation display. Therefore, "=" is displayed in the left digit such as "= 1" on the pressing order display device D270 so that it is possible to distinguish between the number of payout medals and the pressing order navigation display. With this configuration, when the display of the pressing order display device D270 is a two-digit number, it is a display of the number of medals to be paid out. If there is, it is configured to be able to determine that it is the display of the push order navigation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being erroneously recognized. Further, in the advantageous section indicator YH provided at the lower right of the pushing order display device D270, a lamp indicating that the current game section is an "advantageous section" is lit. At the same time, a display of “40 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantage section” (or “in the AT state”) is displayed on the effect display device S40. Also, the right side in the drawing illustrates an image displayed on the pressing order display device D270 and the effect display device S40 when the pressing order is “middle → left → right” (corresponding instruction number is “A3”). I have. In addition, since the current game section is the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on, and “25 remaining games” indicating the number of remaining games in the “advantaged section” is displayed on the effect display device S40. Is displayed. It should be noted that a role with a pressing order (a condition device with a medal payout among the condition devices having different roles stopped and displayed according to a reel stop order, for example, a bell) and a replay with a pressing order (a reel stop order) Of the condition devices that are differently stopped and displayed, the segment display of the instruction number of the condition device related to the replaying game) may be different, and the display method of the push order display device D270 is limited to seven segments. Instead, for example, an instruction may be made by turning on a plurality of LEDs using an LED display according to a lighting pattern corresponding to the instruction number. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which an advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of the credit amount display device D200. In this case, it is preferable to turn on the advantageous section indicator YH until the operation of the settlement button D60 becomes effective. When the player stops playing the game, the player visually checks the number-of-credits display device D200 to check whether medals remain. Then, if medals remain, the settlement button D60 is operated. That is, by turning on the light until the settlement button D60 becomes effective, a user-friendly gaming machine can be prevented from erroneously quitting the game even though it is an “advantageous section” from the next game. be able to.

  In addition, the notification mode of the game section in the advantageous section indicator YH is not limited to this example, and a section indicator similar to the advantageous section indicator YH is provided at the lower right of both of the two seven segments (the section indicator is displayed). In such a case, when the left-hand section indicator is lit, it is notified that the current game section is the “normal section”, and on the other hand, When the section indicator is turned on, it may be configured to notify that the current game section is an “advantageous section”. Further, the “normal section” and the “advantageous section” are distinguished by the color and lighting mode at the time of lighting of the section display (for example, “green” in the “normal section” and “red” in the “advantage section”). Alternatively, the lighting may be performed in a “normal section”, and “blinking” in an “advantaged section”. Further, the display mode of the section display is changed according to the “game during AT inside BB”, “BB state during AT”, “AT precursor state”, “state during AT”, etc. in the “advantage section”. You may. Furthermore, the present game section may be configured to be able to recognize that the current game section is the “standby section” separately from the “normal section” and the “advantageous section”. However, the "normal section" and the "advantageous section" are distinguished by using a different section indicator, for example, so that the player can recognize whether the current game section is the "advantageous section" or not. It is preferable to make it easier.

  Also, regarding the display on the effect display device S40 indicating the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section", for example, in the "AT precursor state" or "AT preparation in progress", the number of remaining games in the "advantageous section" is not displayed. A configuration may be adopted (in a state where the profit is relatively low for the player, the disadvantage for the player is not notified that the number of remaining games in the “advantage section” is subtracted). However, even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the section display is turned on to notify the player that the vehicle is in the “advantageous section”. At the same time, it is preferable that the section indicator be configured to be controlled by the main control board M side and that the section indicator be installed at a position where the display is easily visible to the player.

  Next, a control process executed on the sub-control board S side will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Sub-side program start processing>
First, FIG. 38 is a subroutine showing a sub-side program start process. This sub-program start process is called and executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits interruption. Next, in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes various initialization processes such as initialization of the CPU and RAM, calculation of a checksum, and the like.

  Next, in step 2008, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum value calculated and stored when the power is turned off. If Yes in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values match, in step 2010, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described below. It is determined whether or not the state has been restored from the state in which the power supply has been interrupted, that is, whether or not the state has been completely restored.

  In the case of Yes in step 2010, in other words, when it is determined that the return is complete, in step 2012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S permitted the interrupt and executed when the power was cut off. The processing is returned to one command processing.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2008, in other words, if it is determined in the determination processing in step 2008 that both checksum values do not match, in step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the RAM. Execute After executing the processing of step 2014 or in the case of No in step 2010, the processing is shifted to the sub main loop processing.

<Sub main loop processing>
Next, FIG. 39 is a subroutine showing a sub main loop process. The sub-main loop process is called and executed after the sub-side program start process shown in FIG. 38 is executed.

  First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S permits the interruption. Next, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a command receiving process. This command receiving process is a process of receiving various commands transmitted from the main control board M.

  Next, in step 2250, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes one-command processing described later. The one command process is a process executed based on a control command from the main control unit 100. Specific processing will be described later. In step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a predetermined time, for example, 16 ms, has elapsed, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, returns to step 2108. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process returns to step 2102. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 16 ms, and can be appropriately changed according to processing.

<Sub-side power-off processing>
Next, FIG. 40 is a subroutine showing a sub-side power-off process executed on the sub-control board S side. The sub-side power-off process is a process started when the sub-control board S detects the power-off.

  First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the watchdog timer. In step 2204, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the sub-side program start processing is being executed. If Yes in step 2204, the process moves to step 2210. On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calculates the checksum. Next, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S saves various data (calculation results of the checksum, the address of the program being executed, etc.), and proceeds to step 2210.

  Next, in step 2210, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether 500 ms has elapsed. Here, when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off process is terminated. On the other hand, if No in step 2210, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the power has been restored. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S updates the number of occurrences of instantaneous interruption. Next, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts the operation of the watchdog timer, and returns to the processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. If it is determined in step 2212 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step 2210 described above.

<1 command processing>
Next, FIG. 41 is a subroutine showing one command process called and executed in the process of step 2250 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is time to operate the start lever. In the case of No in step 2252, in other words, when it is determined that it is the operation timing of the start lever, in step 3000, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a start lever operation effect-related determination process described later. I do. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2252, in other words, if it is not the operation timing of the start lever, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether it is the first reel stop reception timing. If No in step 2254, in other words, if it is the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a first-time cylinder stop reception processing subroutine described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, if Yes in step 2254, in other words, if it is not the first reel stop reception timing, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the second reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2258, in other words, if it is the second reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a second-time cylinder stop acceptance process subroutine described later. Then, control goes to a step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2258, in other words, if it is not the second reel stop reception timing, in step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether it is the third reel stop reception timing. . If No in step 2262, in other words, if it is the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 3200, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls a subroutine of a third-casing-stop-state effect-related determination process described later. Run. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a third-body-stop-accepting process described later, and proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2262, in other words, if it is not the third reel stop acceptance timing, in step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the stop display symbol stop timing. . If Yes in step 2266, in other words, if it is the stop display symbol stop timing, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes stop display symbol time processing (not shown), and proceeds to step 7100. Move to On the other hand, if No in step 2266, in other words, if it is not the stop display symbol stop timing, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S immediately proceeds to step 7100.

  Next, in step 7100, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a menu screen display control process described later. Next, in step 7200, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a standby screen display control process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, FIG. 42 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation effect-related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3000 of FIG. 41. First, in step 3002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “high probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3002, in step 3004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the high security failure counter value command received from the main control Check how many more games are guaranteed). Next, in step 3050, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine for battle effect execution determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 3006. Next, in step 3006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a battle effect has been determined to be executed in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3006, in step 3008, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, the state related to the AT of the next game, and the current number of highly secured failure games. Based on the stay stage determination table (see FIG. 44), a stay stage shift lottery (lottery for changing the stay stage) is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 3006, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3002, in step 3010, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the state related to the AT of the game is the “low probability state”. In the case of Yes in step 3010, in step 3012, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the stay stage determination table (FIG. 44) based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. With reference to (see), the stay stage shift lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3010, in step 3014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT of the game is the “AT-in-progress state”. In the case of Yes in step 3014, in step 3100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S calls and executes a subroutine of AT effect determination processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3014, in step 3016, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state related to the AT of the game is the “state for resurrection effect presentation”. In the case of Yes in step 3016, in step 3150, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S calls and executes a subroutine of a resilience availability determination process described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3016, in step 3018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the notice effect and the stay stage based on the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the game, and the state related to the AT of the next game. After the determination, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Note that the stay stage is an effect mainly including a background effect displayed on the effect display device S40, and one of the stay stages is always set. If the stay stage is different, the tendency of various effects such as background effects, notice effects, and the like will be different.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a subroutine showing a battle effect execution availability determination process called and executed in the process of step 3050 in FIG. 42. First, in step 3052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of high security failure games is four or more. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not to execute the battle effect execution lottery (battle effect (win)) with a predetermined probability (１ ／ in this example) to win. Lottery). Next, in step 3058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the battle effect execution possibility lottery executed in step 3056 has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3058, in step 3060, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as a battle effect (win), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 3006). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3058, in step 3062, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 3006). Here, the battle effect is a continuous effect executed over a plurality of games, and the battle effect is won, that is, the battle effect (victory) is executed, so that the player wins the BB role and wins the AT lottery. It is structured so that winning is determined. Note that the configuration related to the battle effect is not limited to this, and if the player has won the BB role even if the player has not won the AT lottery (the state transitions to the “low-probability state” or the “high-probability state” after the BB ends). ) May be configured to execute a battle effect (victory).

  In the case of No in step 3054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device related to the game is a rare combination. Here, in the present example, the rare roles are winning-C (cherry), winning-D (watermelon A), and winning-E (watermelon B). Has become. That is, when the rare combination is stopped and displayed, the player has a feeling of expectation that the rare combination is won simultaneously with the BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S , A predetermined probability (in the present example, 1/3, which is lower than the predetermined probability in step 3056), a gasse battle effect execution possibility lottery (a lottery of whether or not to execute a battle effect (defeat)) ). Next, in Step 3068, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the gas battle effect execution lottery executed in Step 3066 has been won. If Yes in step 3068, in step 3070, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the effect related to the game is a battle effect (defeat), and proceeds to the next process (process in step 3006). If No in Step 3052, Step 3064, or Step 3068, in Step 3072, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game as an effect other than the battle effect, and performs the next process (the process of Step 3006). ). Here, the battle effect (defeat) may be configured to be executable even in the “normal section”.

  As described above, when the number of highly secured games is equal to or more than a predetermined number, for example, when the number is 4 or more, a continuous effect such as a battle effect can be executed over a plurality of games, When the number is less than the number, for example, when the number is less than 4, the continuous effect such as a battle effect is configured not to be executed. (The "normal section" is set), it is possible to prevent the advantageous section indicator YH from being turned off, and to perform the battle effect only when it is possible to secure the lighting of the advantageous section indicator YH until the battle effect ends. By executing, a user-friendly gaming machine can be achieved without impairing the player's expectation of winning the BB.

  In addition, when the role of rare is elected, since it is configured to be able to execute continuous production such as battle production (defeat), the execution frequency of battle production can be ensured, and the game will always proceed with expectation Can be.

  Next, FIG. 44 is an example of a stay stage determination table. Note that the stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is an extract of only a part. The stay stage determination table shown in FIG. 44 is used when the game is in the “low-probability state”, and is used when the game is in the “high-probability state” and the number of high security failure games is 4 or more. There are three types of tables: a table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of high security failure games is three or less.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “low probability state”, the relationship between the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the real game, and the corresponding number is shown. Stipulated. In the case of the “low probability state”, the current stay stage is composed of two types of staging stages, a desert stage and a town stage, and the transition stage is a desert stage, a town stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. And four production stages. The states relating to the AT of the next game include three states: a "low probability state", a "normal BB inside medium game", and a "high probability state".

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game”, 0 to 979 is assigned as a number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside game” in the next game, the number of shifts from the desert stage to the city stage in the game is 980 to 980. 999 has been assigned.

  Further, when the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB internal middle game”, the number of characters to shift from the town stage to the desert stage in the game is set to 0 to 0. 19 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to the “low probability state” or “normal BB inside middle game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the number of characters when the city stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  Further, when the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the game transitions to the “high probability state” in the next game, 0 to 249 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current staying stage is the town stage and the state shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 250 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 500 to 749 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “high probability state” in the next game, 750 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of games with high security failure is 4 or more, the relationship between the current stay stage, the stay stage of the real game, and the number of sets is defined. Have been. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage.

  In the case where the current stay stage is the desert stage and the desert stage is maintained in the game, 0 to 879 are assigned as the numerical values. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 880 to 929 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts from the desert stage to the conference room stage in the game, 930 to 959 are assigned. The current stay stage is the desert stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the town stage, and 0 to 879 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the town stage is maintained in the game, 880 to 929 are assigned as the numbers. The current stay stage is the town stage, and 930 to 959 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the town stage to the conference room stage in the game. The current stay stage is the town stage, and 960 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the conference room stage is maintained in the game, 100 to 949 are assigned as the numbers. The current stay stage is the conference room stage, and 950 to 999 are assigned as the number of positions when shifting from the conference room stage to the cave stage in the game.

  The current staying stage is a cave stage, and 0 to 49 are assigned as numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage in the game. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 50 to 99 are assigned as the number of positions when the game shifts from the cave stage to the city stage. The current stay stage is a cave stage, and 100 to 199 are assigned as the number of positions when the game is shifted from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the cave stage is maintained in the game, 200 to 999 are assigned as the numbers.

  In the stay stage determination table used when the game is in the “high probability state” and the number of games with high security failure is 3 or less, the current stay stage, the state related to the AT of the next game, the stay stage of the real game, , And the relationship with the number. As the current stay stage and the stage to be shifted, there are four types of performance stages: a desert stage, a city stage, a conference room stage, and a cave stage. As states relating to the AT of the next game, there are three states: a "high probability state", a "game inside the advantageous BB", and a "low probability state".

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or the “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 979 is assigned as the number when the desert stage is maintained in the game. ing. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 980 to 999 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage. Have been assigned.

  When the current stay stage is the city stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 19 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. Have been assigned. When the current stay stage is the town stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 20 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the town stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of characters to shift from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the relevant game is 0 to 0. 29 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the number of units to be changed from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game is 30 to 59 are assigned. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the next game shifts to the “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 60 to 999 are set as the number when the conference room stage is maintained in the game. Have been assigned.

  When the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 0 to 29 are set as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage. Have been assigned. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 30 to 59 are set as the number of shifts from the cave stage to the city stage in the game. Have been assigned. If the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, the number of characters to shift from the cave stage to the conference room stage in the game is 60 to 99. Is assigned. When the current staying stage is a cave stage and the next game shifts to “high probability state” or “advantageous BB inside game”, 100 to 999 are assigned as the number when the cave stage is maintained in the game. ing.

  When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low-probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as numbers when the desert stage is maintained in the game. When the current stay stage is the desert stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the desert stage to the city stage in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the town stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the town stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the city stage and the state shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the city stage is maintained in the game.

  When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when shifting from the conference room stage to the desert stage in the game. When the current stay stage is the conference room stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game is shifted from the conference room stage to the city stage in the game.

  If the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the “low probability state” in the next game, 0 to 499 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the desert stage. When the current stay stage is a cave stage and the game shifts to the low probability state in the next game, 500 to 999 are assigned as the numbers when the game shifts from the cave stage to the city stage in the game.

  As described above, when the state is the “low probability state”, two stages of the desert stage or the city stage can be selected (step 3012 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, when the state is the “high probability state”, four stages of the desert stage, the town stage, the conference room stage, and the cave stage can be selected (step 3008 in FIG. 42). In other words, it is configured that four stay stages can be selected in the case of the “advantageous section”, while two stay stages can be selected in the “normal section”, and can be selected in the “normal section”. The second stay stage can also be selected in the “advantage section”. With this configuration, even in the “normal section” where there is no expectation of winning the AT lottery, by selecting a stay stage that can be a stay stage in the “advantageous section”, the user can be tired of the “normal section”. The game machine can proceed. Also, when transitioning from the “high-probability state” to the “low-probability state”, that is, when changing from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”, the “normal section” is selected at the “advantageous section” stage. By selecting the effect stage, it is difficult for the player to determine that the transition from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section” is made, and the game can be continued with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, a part of the production stage selected in the “normal section” overlaps with the production stage selected in the “advantage section” (the production stage that can be selected in the “normal section” but is not selected in the “advantage section”). May be included).

  In addition, the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is four or more and the stay stage determination table used when the number of highly secured obstacle games is three or less are different. If the number of games is reduced (less than 3 games), do not shift to a staying stage with a higher expectation, which is an “advantageous section” than the current staying stage (for example, desert stage → meeting room stage). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged from becoming a “normal section” with a small number of games despite shifting to the staying stage with a higher degree of expectation. Note that the stay stages are in the order of “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, and conference room stage” in descending order of expected degree of “advantageous section” (which is difficult to select in “advantageous section”).

  Note that the configuration of the stay stage is not limited to that of this example, and what can be suggested by the stay stage is determined by selecting the expected degree that is an “advantageous section”, the expected degree that has won the AT lottery, and the BB. It may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation. As an example, it is configured so that the stay stage can be shifted in a game that has won the BB role or the rare role (when the AT lottery is won by the BB role and when the AT rare lot is won by the sole rare role) ), The expected degree of winning in the AT lottery differs according to the staying stage that has been shifted, and the desert stage, the town stage, the cave stage, and the conference room stage are arranged in the order of the lowest expected degree. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the degree of expectation elected to the role of BB differs depending on the staying stage that has been shifted, and may be configured in the order of “desert stage, town stage, cave stage, conference room stage” in order of decreasing expectation. Good (for example, when the process proceeds to the conference room stage, it is determined that the BB internal election or the AT lottery has been elected).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a subroutine showing an during-AT effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game is the AT final game. If Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the continuous lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3106, in step 3108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continues the AT-related effect (success) in the effect related to the game (the AT is continued and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60. Then, an effect that informs that the state relating to the AT of the next game becomes “the state during AT” or an AT continuation effect (failure) (determine that the AT continues and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). It is determined that the state relating to the AT of the next game is an “in-AT state” or “a state of a resurrection performance effect”), and the flow shifts to step 3126. Here, when the continuous lottery is won, the AT continuation stir effect (success) to the AT continuation stir effect (failure) is determined at a ratio of 4: 1. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the continuous lottery has been won, the AT continuous fanning effect (failure) may be executed, and in such a case, it corresponds to the first game of the next set. In the next game, the resurrection effect (success) is executed, and the player feels as if he / she has won the resurrection lottery (actually, the player has won the continuous lottery and the main control board M The control on the side is the same as when the AT continuation effect (success) is executed). With such a configuration, it is rare to win the resurrection lottery in the “state of resurrection feasibility effect”, but {wins the lottery of 2320/65536 (in the case of setting 1) in one game} and wins the continuous production By configuring so that the resurrection effect (success) can be executed even when the resurrection effect is executed, it is possible to increase the rate at which the resurrection effect (success) is executed when the resurrection effect is executed, and the player expects the resurrection effect. The feeling can be enhanced.

  Also, in the case of No in step 3106, in step 3110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the effect relating to the game is an AT continuation effect (failure), and proceeds to step 3126. Also, in the case of No in step 3104, in step 3112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect related to the game to be an AT late effect, and proceeds to step 3126. Also, in the case of No in step 3102, in step 3114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the next game has executed the AT continuation stir effect (failure). In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the effect related to the game in a resurrection effect (success) (similar to the resurrection effect (success) performed in the “resurrection availability effect state”). In the present process, the effect is determined to be “effect in which“ the state during AT ”has been continued”, and the routine goes to Step 3126. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 3114, the processing shifts to step 3126.

  Next, in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the number of AT games has been added in the game. In the case of Yes in step 3126, in step 3028, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds an effect related to the game (an effect to notify that the number of remaining AT games has been added, for example, “+50 GET” or the like). ), And proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3126, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the effect relating to the game to an effect during AT (an effect executed during AT such as an “AT state”), and the next processing ( The processing shifts to step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a subroutine showing a resurrection feasibility effect determination process called and executed in the process of step 3150 in FIG. First, in step 3152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the resurrection lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revives the effect related to the game (success) (this is an effect mode similar to the effect performed in step 3116 described above, This is an effect of notifying that the player has won the resurrection lottery in the “resurrection availability state”, and the state shifts to the “AT state” in the next game, and the initial value is set in the AT counter M60). After the determination, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 3152, in Step 3156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S revived the production related to the game (failure) (in the “revival possibility production state”, the rescue lottery was not won). This is an effect that informs the user that the game is going to go to the “low-probability state” in the next game).

  As described above, the “state of resurrection feasibility effect” is also an advantageous section, that is, the continuous lottery is won in the AT final game (the final game in the “AT state”) which is the “advantageous section”. Even if there is no, in the next game, "Resurrection availability state", the "advantageous section" is configured to be extended, so the player checks whether or not the advantageous section indicator YH is lit. It is difficult to determine whether the resurrection effect is successful only by doing so, and attention will be paid to the result of the resurrection effect. Further, as described above, the execution state of the lottery regarding the AT is different between the “during the AT state” and the “state of the resurrection feasibility effect”. In other words, the next lottery in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed and the subsequent game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed differs in the manner of performing the AT-related lottery in the game in which the resurrection effect (successful) is executed. .

In the present embodiment, in the next game in which the AT-in-progress state has been completed, a transition is made to the “resurrection feasibility effect state” of one game, and the resurrection lottery is executed in the “resurrection feasibility effect state”. By doing so, both the execution game of the resurrection effect (success) and the execution game of the resurrection effect (failure) are set as “advantageous sections”, that is, by configuring the advantageous section indicator YH to light up, Although it has been prevented that it is possible to determine whether or not the AT ends without confirming the result, such a configuration may be configured as follows.
(1) In one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the state relating to the AT is set to the "AT state". In the one game in which the resurrection lottery is executed, the resurrection flag is turned on. Turning off the flag sets a different lottery mode for the AT.
(2) It is configured not to execute the resurrection lottery, and the control on the main control board M side is configured to determine whether or not the “AT state” is ended based on whether or not the continuous lottery is won, and The execution timing of the continuous lottery is set to a game before the AT final game (one game before the AT final game, the first game in the set being executed, and the like). With such a configuration, a resurrection effect (success) and a resurrection effect (failure) can be executed as effects on the sub control board S side in the AT final game. Examples of the effects include “a game before the AT final game: AT continuation production (success) → AT final game: production to start the next set of ATs”, “a game before the AT final game: AT continuation production”. Direction (continued to the next game) → AT final game: AT continuous fanning effect (success) ”,“ Game before AT final game: AT continuous fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: Resurrection effect (successful) ”,“ AT A game before the final game: AT continuous fanning effect (failure) → AT final game: resurrection effect (failure) ”may be executed. That is, the main control board M determines whether or not the “AT state” is continued (the next set is executed) depending on whether or not the continuous lottery is won. It may be configured to execute an AT continuation effect and a resurrection effect.
(3) In the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed, an effect is executed in the same manner as the resurrection effect (failure) until a predetermined timing, and the resurrection effect (success) is obtained from the predetermined timing. , That is, a notification that the AT will be continued to the player at the predetermined timing. In the case of such a configuration, as the predetermined timing,
(1) A bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to a game in which a resurrection effect (success) is executed, which can be executed when a continuous lottery is won.
(2) The start lever operation timing according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed. When the start lever operation timing is reached, the effect having the same effect as the resurrection effect (defeat) is not executed.
(3) The timing at which the first stop button of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing at which the first stop is turned on);
(4) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the first stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (the timing of the first stop on → off);
(5) A timing at which a stop button serving as a second stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (a timing at which the second stop is turned on);
(6) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the second stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (timing when the second stop is turned on → off),
(7) The timing when the stop button for the third stop according to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is pressed (the timing when the third stop is turned on);
(8) Timing of releasing the stop button after pressing the stop button which is the third stop related to the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed (the timing of the third stop on → off);
And so on,
(9) Bet button operation timing (game medal insertion timing) related to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed,
(10) Start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed;
And so on. In addition, in the case where it is determined by lottery which of the various timings such as the above (1) to (10) is to be set, the timing after the timing when the stop button for the first stop is pressed is determined. Even if neither the continuous lottery nor the resurrection lottery has been won, the advantageous section indicator YH is continuously lit, so that the player presses the stop button for the third stop, and then presses the stop button. Can be played with a sense of expectation that the AT will continue until the timing at which the AT is released or until the start lever operation timing relating to the game following the game in which the resurrection effect is executed.

<Start lever operation processing>
Next, FIG. 47 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation process called and executed in the process of step 2300 in FIG.

  Next, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state regarding the AT is the AT-in-progress state. If Yes in step 2302, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the AT-in-progress state, in step 2350, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out and executes a start lever-operating AT-in-time process described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2302, in other words, when the state related to the AT is not the AT in-progress state, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the state related to the AT is the special precursor state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2304, in other words, if the state related to the AT is the special indication state, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the start lever specialization processing when the start lever is operated, which will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2304, in other words, if the state relating to the AT is not the “specialization precursor state”, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the state relating to the AT to the “additional specialization state”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is “additional specialization state”, in step 2450, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs additional addition specialization processing at the time of start lever operation described later. The process is read out and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2306, in other words, if the state related to the AT is not the “additional specialization state”, in step 2307, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the state related to the AT to It is determined whether or not it is a "game". If Yes in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a start lever operation middle BB inside middle processing subroutine. Is called and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  If No in step 2307, in other words, if the state related to AT is not “advantageous BB inside game”, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the RT state is “RT1”. Is determined. If Yes in step 2308, in other words, if the RT state is “RT1”, in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the AT-related state to “no push order navigation” It is determined whether or not the state is related to an AT that does not occur, such as “low probability state”, “normal BB internal game”, “normal BB state”, and the like. If Yes in step 2310, in other words, if the state related to the AT is no push order navigation, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether an avoidance command has been received. Note that, as described above, the reverse control instruction command, the reverse push avoidance command, the forward push instruction command, and the forward push avoidance command are received by the sub-control board S side, so that it is not a configuration in which the effect related to the push order navigation can be executed. When the main control board M sends the AT addition lottery and the command related to the number of AT addition games is sent to the sub control board S when the AT addition lottery is won, and the sub control board S receives the command. Alternatively, the sub-control board S may be configured to determine the execution timing and the effect mode of the effect related to the push order navigation.

  If Yes in step 2312, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be established as the push order navigation display in the first numerical display mode group. Is displayed on the effect display device S40, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and “at the AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, the state transits to “RT1” and the “low-probability state”. In this case (before the replay game 04 is stopped), if the player has won the replay of seven reverse push whites or the seven forward push blacks, the additional number of AT games does not occur. It is configured such that the pushing order that is not in a straight line is navigated. When the number of games elapses from the state of “RT1” and the “at-AT state” and the AT counter value becomes 0, and the state shifts to “RT1” and the “low-probability state”, the “advantage section” is still obtained. And the pushing order bell may generate the pushing order navigation, but the pushing order replay may be configured so that the pushing order navigation does not occur.

  If No in Step 2308, No in Step 2310, or No in Step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an effect image and a background image based on the state related to the AT in Step 2316. (Step 2110).

<Processing during AT at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 48 is a subroutine showing a process during AT during start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2350 in FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2352, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2354, and determines the instruction number in Step 2356. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not executed, such as a "probability state" (a game section is also a "normal section"), a command related to an instruction number may not be transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped. For example, the push order navigation display at the time of execution of the push order bell and the push order navigation display of the push order replay are the same display mode group (for example, the push order is notified by a number, and the display colors related to the numbers are the same). ) Is applicable. Further, in the case of such a configuration, at the time of executing the push order navigation on the effect display device S40, an effect image (for example, a character image) different from the push order navigation display is displayed, and the push order bell is displayed. A different effect image may be displayed at the time of executing the pushing order navigation and at the time of executing the pushing order navigation related to the pushing order replay.

  Next, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display in six steps. Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numeric display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A1 which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “left → middle → right” which can obtain the maximum payout number is circled. Display in display mode.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2358, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the condition device of the game is Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the push order replay game as a push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41, only the numeral 1 is displayed as the push order navigation display.

  If No in step 2362, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay game, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively called an avoidance command. If Yes in step 2366, in other words, if the avoidance command has been received, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the above-described processing in step 2360, 2364 or 2368, and then displays the background image during AT on the effect display device S40 in step 2370.

  Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is three or less. If Yes in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is three or less, in step S2374, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode B (display mode described later). (A display mode that is less noticeable than A).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. In step 2376, in the case of Yes, in other words, in the case where the forward pressing instruction command is received, in step 2378, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the image to be avoided as the pressing order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in step 2376, or if the process in step 2378 has been performed, in step 2380, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a reverse push instruction command has been received. In step 2380, in the case of Yes, in other words, in the case of receiving the reverse push instruction command, in step 2382, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided as the push order navigation display in the first order. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the number display mode group.

  If No in Step 2380 or if the processing in Step 2382 is performed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next processing (the processing in Step 2110).

  If No in step 2372, in other words, if the number of remaining AT games is four or more, in step S2384, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the number of remaining AT games in display mode A (the display mode described above). (Display mode more prominent than B) on the effect display device S40. Here, when there are four or more games, the display is in display mode A, and when there are three or less games, the display is in display mode B.

  Next, in step 2386, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether a forward push instruction command has been received. In step 2386, if Yes, in other words, if a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2388, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in step 2386, or if the process in step 2388 is executed, in step 2390, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the reverse pressing instruction command has been received. In step 2390, if Yes, in other words, if a reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2392, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S responds to “right → middle → left” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order to be performed is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  If No in Step 2390 or if the process of Step 2392 has been performed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to the next process (Process of Step 2110). As described above, when the number of remaining AT games is small, in other words, when the display of the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that is more prominent than display mode A, the forward push instruction command or reverse Even if the push instruction command is received, the effect of displaying "Aim at 7!" Together with the image of the arrow is not executed, and the middle reel in the pushing order in which the white seven and the black seven are not stopped and displayed on the invalid line is the first stop reel. It was configured to execute the push order navigation. With this configuration, in the case where the number of remaining AT games is small, the number of remaining AT games is displayed in display mode B, which is a display mode that encourages the player to know that the number of remaining AT games is small. Can be configured so that the visibility of the display of the number of remaining AT games in the display mode B is not hindered by the image of the arrow or the display of “Aim at 7!”. Similarly, in a situation where the number of remaining AT games displayed on the effect display device S40 is small, a continuous effect (eg, an AT-in-state) (a state related to an AT in which the push-navigation can be executed) continues to be activated (for example, a continuous effect). , Battle effect), the image of the arrow and “Aim at 7!” Are not displayed during the execution of the battle effect, so that the visibility of the battle effect is not hindered. be able to. Further, with this configuration, even when the number of remaining AT games in the effect display device S40 becomes 0, and a message is displayed indicating that the battle effect has been defeated and the “at-AT state” ends, the battle effect is being displayed. If the forward push instruction command or the reverse push instruction command has been received at the same time, the forward push instruction command or the reverse push is performed at the operation timing of the bet button D220 after the display indicating that the “AT state” is finished. The number of AT-added games based on the instruction command (based on the win of the forward push black 7 replay or the reverse push of white 7 replay) is notified, that is, the game that has won the AT add-on lottery is notified that the number of AT games has been added. Instead, it can be configured to notify that the number of the AT games has been added at the subsequent timing, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

<Special precursor sign processing at start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 49 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation specialization precursor process called and executed in step 2400 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2402, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2404, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2406. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not executed, such as a "probability state" (a game section is also a "normal section"), a command related to an instruction number may not be transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6.

  If Yes in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order bell, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as the push order navigation display in step 2410. Are displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the winning order-A2, which is the pushing order bell, is won, the number indicating the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order “left → right → middle” that can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Display in display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may be a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2408, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pushing order bell, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines in step 2412 that the condition device of the game is the pushing order replaying game. Is determined. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the second number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information for associating the first stop button with one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, the pressing order information is displayed at a position near the stop button D40 corresponding to the reel to be stopped in the effect display device S40.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2412, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received the forward push instruction command. Judge. If Yes in step 2416, in other words, if the forward push instruction command is received, in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in Step 2416, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in Step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the reverse push instruction command has been received. to decide. If Yes in step 2420, in other words, if the reverse push instruction command is received, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image.

  Next, in the case of No in Step 2420, in other words, in the case where the reverse push command has not been received, in Step 2424, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. . Here, the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as avoidance commands. If Yes in step 2424, in other words, if the avoidance command is received, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided in the second numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 as a group.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of steps 2410, 2414, 2418, 2422, 2426, or in the case of No in step 2424, in step 2428 an effect display of the background image during AT is performed. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step S2430, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Additional processing for start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 50 is a subroutine showing an additional specialization process at the time of start lever operation called and executed in the process of step 2450 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in Step 2452, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in Step 2454, and indicates the instruction number in Step 2456. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not executed, such as a "probability state" (a game section is also a "normal section"), a command related to an instruction number may not be transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the condition device of the game is the pushing order bell or the common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2458, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. In the first numerical display mode group, an image indicating the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4 which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” which can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may be a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2458 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, in step 2462 the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2462, in other words, if the condition device of the game is the push order replay, in step 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as the push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information corresponding to the first stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2462 described above, in other words, when the condition device of the game is not the push order replay, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the forward push instruction command It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2466, in other words, if a forward push instruction command is received, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “left → center → right” as a push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is a forward pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a left stop button D41, a middle stop button D42, and a right stop button D43, respectively, in order from left to right. The pushing order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2466 described above, in other words, in the case where the forward push instruction command has not been received, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the reverse push instruction command has been received. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2470, in other words, in the case of receiving the reverse push instruction command, in step 2472, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S corresponds to “right → middle → left” as the push order navigation display. An image indicating the pressing order is displayed on the effect display device S40 as an arrow image. That is, since the pressing order is reverse pressing, the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button are a right stop button D43, a middle stop button D42, and a left stop button D41, respectively, in order from right to left. The pushing order can be suggested by the image of the arrow pointing toward.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2470 described above, in other words, in the case where the reverse push instruction command has not been received, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the avoidance command has been received. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2474, in other words, when the avoidance command is received, at step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image whose avoidance is to be avoided in the first numerical display mode as the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in a group. Here, the avoidance command generically refers to both the forward push avoidance command and the reverse push avoidance command. Therefore, the process of step 2476 is performed regardless of whether the forward push avoidance command is received or the reverse push avoidance command is received. For example, when a forward push avoidance command is received, a number “1” is displayed on the lower right side from the center of the effect display device S40 in order to avoid a forward push “left → middle → right”. Information as if the one-stop button is the right-stop button D43 is displayed as a pressing order navigation display.

  Next, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has executed the processing of the above-described steps 2460, 2464, 2468, 2472, 2476, or in the case of No in 2474, in step 2480, the effect of displaying the background image during AT is displayed. It is displayed on the device S40, and in step 2482, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Advantageous BB internal processing during start lever operation>
Next, FIG. 51 is a subroutine showing a start lever operation advantageous BB inside middle process called and executed in the process of step 2700 of FIG. 47.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on the condition device related to the game in a step 2702, confirms winning / replay winning information related to the game in a step 2704, and indicates an instruction number in a step 2706. Check the command related to. As described above, in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, such as an “AT state”, the main control board M transmits a command related to winning / replay winning information to the sub-control board S side, If the staging group number is transmitted in a state related to an AT in which the push order navigation is not executed, such as a "probability state" (a game section is also a "normal section"), a command related to an instruction number may not be transmitted. good. Furthermore, the main control board M transmits the effect group number in the same manner as the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation is not executed even in the state relating to the AT in which the push order navigation can be executed, and transmits the effect group number and the instruction number to the effect group number. Based on such a command, the configuration may be such that the pressing order bell (or the pressing order replay) is won and the pressing order of the correct answer can be grasped.

  Next, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantageous BB inside middle game. If Yes in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has not elapsed since the shift to the advantage BB internal middle game, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S The condition device of (1) determines whether or not it is a pushing order bell or a common bell. Here, the pressing order bell is one of the above-mentioned winning-A1 to winning-A6 and winning-B.

  If Yes in step 2710, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order bell or a common bell, in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order bell as a push order navigation display. An image suggesting the correct pressing order of the 6 selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first numerical display mode group. The pressing order is information in which the first stop button, the second stop button, and the third stop button correspond to the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43. For example, in the case of winning the prize-A4 which is a pressing order bell, a number indicating a pressing order corresponding to the pressing order “right → left → middle” which can obtain the maximum payout number is surrounded by an asterisk. Is displayed in the display mode. The first number display mode group and the second number display mode group may display numerical values indicating the pressing order in different display mode groups. For example, the first number display mode group may be a number. May be displayed in blue, and the second number display mode group may display numbers in red.

  Next, in the case of No at step 2710 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is neither the pushing order bell nor the common bell, at step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S The device determines whether or not it is a push order replay. Here, the push order replay is one of replays-D1 to D3.

  If Yes in step 2714, in other words, if the condition device of the game is a push order replay, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the push order replay game as a push order navi display. An image indicating the correct pressing order of the three selection pressing orders is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the first number display mode group. Here, since the pressing order is three choices, the pressing order is information corresponding to the first stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, or the right stop button D43. For example, when the first stop button is the left stop button D41 as the pressing order of the correct answer, a number “1” is displayed on the lower left side from the center of the effect display device S40, and the first stop button is the middle stop button D42. In the case of, the number “1” is displayed at the lower center of the effect display device S40, and when the first stop button is the right stop button D43, the lower right of the center of the effect display device S40 is displayed. The numeral "1" is displayed as a push order navigation display. In other words, information on the pressing order is displayed at a position near the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped.

  Next, in the case of No in step 2714 described above, in other words, if the condition device of the game is not the pressing order replay, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives the command related to 7 replays It is determined whether or not. Here, the forward push instruction command, the reverse push instruction command, the forward push avoidance command, and the reverse push avoidance command are collectively referred to as 7 replay commands. If Yes in step 2718, in other words, if a command related to 7 replays has been received, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image to be avoided as the first number in the push order navigation display. It is displayed on the effect display device S40 in the display mode group.

  Next, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the processing of the above-described steps 2712, 2716, 2720, or in the case of No in step 2718, in step 2722, displays the background image during AT to the effect display device S40. Then, in step S2724, the number of remaining AT games is displayed on display effect display device S40 in display mode A, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2110).

  If No in step 2708, in other words, if the predetermined game (five games) has elapsed since the shift to the advantage BB internal middle game, in step 2726, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the effect display device S40. Then, the fact that the BB has been won is notified (in this process, the pressing order navigation is not displayed), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Process for receiving the first torso stop>
Next, FIG. 52 is a subroutine showing a first-body-stop-acceptance process that is called and executed in the process of step 2500 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2502, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs a stop button operation based on the correct push order as the first stop. It is determined whether or not.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2504, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S The display related to the first stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2504, in other words, when there is no operation of the stop button based on the order of pressing the correct answer as the first stop, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the forward push navigation or reverse push. It is determined whether or not the pressing order navigation related to the pressing navigation is being displayed. Here, the 7 replays are a general term for a replay of seven forward-pressed blacks and a replay of seven reverse-pressed whites. In the case of Yes in step 2508, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S darkly displays the push order navigation (continuously darkly displayed in the game), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). Migrate.

  In the case of No in step 2508, in other words, if the push order navigation related to 7 replays is not being displayed, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes all the push order navigation displays and the push order fails. The effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<Processing at the time of accepting the second torso stop>
Next, FIG. 53 is a subroutine showing a second-body-stop-accepting process called and executed in the process of step 2550 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the pressing order bell, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2556, in other words, when there is an operation of the stop button based on the correct pressing order as the second stop, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S 2 The display related to the stop is deleted, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2556, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the second stop, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S Erase, a push order failure effect is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

  Next, in the case of No in step 2552, in other words, if the push order navigation is not being displayed, or in the case of No in step 2554, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is not the push order bell, immediately Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110).

<3rd torso stop effect-related decision processing>
Next, FIG. 54 is a subroutine showing a third trunk stoppage effect-related determination process called and executed in the process of step 3200 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 3202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the BB combination has won. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in other words, when the BB combination is won, in step 3204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is won during the non-AT ("low probability state" or "high probability state"). It is determined whether or not it is a BB combination. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in other words, in the case of the winning BB combination during the non-AT, in step 3206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the non-AT BB start effect determination table to determine the AT of the game. Based on the status and the BB combination, the BB start effect (the effect executed when the BB combination is won) is determined and executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, in the case of No in step 3204, in other words, the BB role which has been won during the AT ("AT state", "additional specialization state", "specialization preparation state", or "state for resilience production") If there is, in step 3208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the BB start effect determination table during AT, determines and executes the BB start effect based on the state of the AT regarding the game and the BB combination, and executes the following. The processing shifts to processing (processing of step 2600).

  Next, if No in step 3202, in other words, if the BB combination does not win, in step 3210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines and executes an effect based on the effect performed in the game, The process moves to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  The non-AT in-AT BB start effect determination table shown in the lower left of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of the BB in the non-AT state. The non-AT BB start effect determination table is a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). There are two types of states relating to the AT: “Normal BB inside game” and “Advantageous BB inside game”. The BB start effect is of three types: a normal effect, a high expectation effect, and a premium effect. It should be noted that, depending on the type of the BB start effect in the BB that has been won during the non-AT, the degree of expectation to shift to the “AT state” after the end of the BB is configured to be different. → High-expected production → Premier production ”.

  If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is a normal BB inside game, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. . If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “normal BB internal middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “normal BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. It is.

  If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a normal effect is 179/256. It is. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type of BB-B) and the state of the game related to the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a high expectation effect is 77. / 256. When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is a premium effect is 0/256. It is.

  When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 179/256. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state of AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. Is 77/256. When the BB combination is a BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “normal BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premium effect. The probability is 0/256.

  If the BB combination is BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a normal effect. The probability is 67/256. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a high expectation effect. Is 157/256. When the BB combination is a BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is a premium effect. The probability is 32/256.

  In the “normal section”, even if the BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won or the BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) is won, the premier production Is determined, so that the possibility that the normal effect is selected is higher than the high expectation effect.

  Even if it is an advantageous section, when a BB (one type BB-B) with a setting difference is won, a premium effect is not selected and a normal effect may be selected rather than a high expectation effect. It is set to be high.

  In the case of the “advantageous section”, when a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is won, a premium effect may be selected. With this configuration, when the premiere effect is selected, the BB without the setting difference is won, and it is determined that the BB without the setting difference ends and the state shifts to the “AT state”. Can be shown to the player. In the case of the “advantageous section” and a BB without a setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C), there is a high possibility that a high expectation effect is selected compared to a normal effect. (It is unlikely that a normal effect will be selected.) In this way, the player can estimate whether or not the AT will be started after the end of the BB by confirming the BB start effect, and have a sense of expectation for winning the AT. In addition, the distribution of the BB start effect related to the BB (one type BB-B) with a setting difference won in the “Normal BB internal game” and the BB without setting difference won in the “Normal BB internal game” The distribution of the BB start effect according to one type BB-A and one type BB-C) is the same distribution. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a setting difference that has been won in the “Normal BB inside game”. The distribution of the BB start effect related to the winning BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C) may be made different from each other. The distribution can be configured to be different depending on whether the effect is an effect or a BB start effect for a BB with no setting difference.

  The BB start effect determination table during AT shown in the lower right of FIG. 54 is a table for determining the effect at the start of BB during AT. The BB start effect determination table during AT is also a table for defining the relationship between the type of BB combination, the state related to AT, the type of BB start effect, and the probability (allocation). There are two types of BB combinations: BB with setting difference (one type BB-B) and BB without setting difference (one type BB-A and one type BB-C). The state relating to the AT is one type of “advantageous BB inside middle game”. The BB start effect is of two types, an effect that can be added and an effect that cannot be added. The addition possible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery can be executed during the execution of the BB, and the addition impossible effect is an effect indicating that the AT addition lottery is not executed during the execution of the BB. The BB won during the AT has no element as to whether or not to win the AT lottery, and depending on the type of the BB, whether or not the lottery at the AT is executed may be different. In addition, during the AT, even if there is a setting difference in which the AT addition lottery is not executed, even in the BB where the game medal can be obtained and the AT is advantageous to the player after the BB ends, the BB executed is the AT addition lottery. It is configured to clearly notify whether or not is executed. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described in detail.

  When the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “advantageous BB inside middle game”, the probability that the BB start effect is an additional effect is 0 / It is 256, and an additional possible effect is not executed. If the BB combination is a BB with a setting difference (one type BB-B) and the state of the game regarding the AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the probability that the BB start effect is an additional effect and the effect is 256 / 256, and an effect that cannot be added is always executed. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C), and the state related to the AT of the game is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect can be added. Is 256/256, and an effect that can be added is always executed. When the BB combination is BB without setting difference (1 type BB-A and 1 type BB-C) and the state of the game related to AT is “advantageous BB inside game”, the BB start effect is not added The probability is 0/256, and no extra performance is performed.

<Processing at the time of accepting the 3rd torso stop>
Next, FIG. 55 is a subroutine showing a third torso stop accepting time process called and executed in the process of step 2600 in FIG. 41.

  Next, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the push order navigation is being displayed in the game. If Yes in step 2602, in other words, if the push order navigation is being displayed, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the condition device related to the game is the push order bell. judge. If Yes in step 2604, in other words, if the condition device related to the game is the push order bell, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the stop button based on the correct push order as the third stop. It is determined whether or not there is an operation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2606, in other words, if there is an operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces an effect as a pressing order successful effect. “GET!” Is displayed on the display device S40. On the other hand, if No in step 2606, in other words, if there is no operation of the stop button based on the pressing order of the correct answer as the third stop, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets “GET Is not displayed.

  In the case of No in step 2602 described above, in other words, when the pressing order navigation is not being displayed, in the case of No in step 2604, in other words, when the condition device related to the game is not the pressing order bell, or in step 2608 or 2610 Is executed, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a command relating to the number of AT-added games (the command set in step 1517) has been received from the main side. As described above, the main control board M transmits a command indicating the number of remaining AT games to the sub-control board S, and the sub-control board S calculates a difference from the previously received command indicating the number of remaining AT games. It may be configured to determine whether the number of AT-added games has been executed and the number of AT-added games, and display the number of AT-added games.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2612, in other words, in the case where a command related to the number of AT games is received from the main side, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the effect display device S40 to display the AT additional game. The number is displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). On the other hand, if No in step 2612, in other words, if a command related to the number of AT games has not been received from the main side, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds an AT to the effect display device S40. The process is shifted to the next process (the process of step 2110) without displaying the number of games. In addition, as a method of informing the number of AT added games, (1) all of the number of added games is notified by the game, (2) a part of the number of added games is notified by the game, and the remaining number of games is set after the game. (3) The number of added games is not notified in the game, and the game after the game (for example, when 7 replays are won, when a common bell is won (when a role that is not originally added) is played), After the execution of the game (continuous effect), the operation of the bet button D220 and the operation of the start lever D50 of the game in which the remaining game number of the effect display device S40 is "0", or the game next to the game in which the game is "0" ).

  Note that when the common bell is won in the "additional specialization state", the display of the number of AT-added games is not displayed even when the game is stopped according to the push order navigation. Absent).

  With the above-described configuration, according to the turning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the gaming machine configured such that the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on in the “advantageous section”, a period that is advantageous for the player Can be appropriately notified. In addition, by providing the “state of resilience effect production”, when a continuous effect is won and the resurrection effect (success) is subsequently executed, the state related to the AT of the game in which the resurrection effect (success) is executed is The advantageous section indicator YH is lit because it is in the "AT state". On the other hand, even when the continuous effect is not won and the resurrection effect (failure) is subsequently executed, the resurrection effect (failure) is executed. By setting the state relating to the AT of the game to be performed to the “state of resurrection performance effect” and the state relating to the AT to “the advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is turned on. With such a configuration, by visually recognizing the advantageous section indicator YH in the game in which the resurrection effect is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the resurrection effect is successful or unsuccessful. In a gaming machine configured to be able to appropriately notify a period that is advantageous to a gaming machine, a gaming machine with high interest can be secured.

  In this example, when the player wins the BB role in the “high probability state”, it is configured to be able to win the AT lottery, and after the completion of the BB, it is configured to be able to shift to the “AT state”. The configuration relating to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, it is configured to be able to win the AT lottery by a rare role such as cherry (it is possible to win even if it is not the BB role). The state relating to the AT may be shifted to the “AT precursor state”, and by playing a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) in the “AT precursor state”, the transition may be made to the “AT in-state”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the menu screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7100 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu screen is not displayed on the effect display device S40. Here, the menu screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG by pressing the sub input button SB or the like, and the player selects from a plurality of items to check various settings and information on the gaming machine. It is a screen that can be. As an example of an item selection and determination method, the user operates the cross key SB2 (having four buttons of an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button) to move a cursor to a desired item, By operating the sub input button SB, the currently selected (cursored) item is determined, and a screen corresponding to the item is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that both the screen for selecting an item and the screen corresponding to the item displayed after determining the selected item are menu screens. Further, the menu screen may have a plurality of display modes, for example, the items that can be selected on the menu screen may be different depending on the game state, or the design of the background image may be different. Even if there is a difference, the menu screen is all referred to.

<Items that can be selected on the menu screen>
Examples of items that can be selected on the menu screen are listed below.
(1) Volume adjustment: The volume output from the gaming machine may be configured so that the player can adjust it. For example, after displaying a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment, the output is performed by operating the right button of the cross key SB2. The volume may be increased and the output volume may be decreased by operating the left button of the cross key SB2.
(2) Light amount adjustment: The light amount (brightness) of various lamps controlled by the sub-control board S such as the LED lamp S10 (stop button lamp S60, bet button lamp S50) may be configured so that the player can adjust the light amount. For example, after displaying the screen corresponding to the light amount adjustment, the light amount (brightness) is increased (brightened) by operating the up button of the cross key SB2, and the light amount (brightness) is weakened by operating the down button of the cross key SB2. (Dark).
(3) Character customization: Characters appearing during the game (such as the main character, the voice of the push order navigation, the battle character, and the character that supports the game progress that is always displayed on the staging display device S40) can be selected and changed. After displaying a screen corresponding to the character customization, the cursor may be moved to the character to be selected with the cross key SB2, and the sub input button SB may be operated.
(4) Reel arrangement table: Reel arrangement may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the reel arrangement table.
(5) Payout Table: A payout table (a list of symbol combinations that constitute replays or winning combinations by being stopped and displayed) may be displayed on a screen corresponding to the payout table. When the payout table is divided and displayed on a plurality of screens, for example, the screen of the payout table may be switched with the left button and the right button of the cross key SB2.

Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7102, in step 7104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the menu screen can be displayed. Here, the menu screen displayable state means that the menu screen is displayed when an operation that can display the menu screen (may be configured to be able to be displayed over time) such as an operation of the sub input button SB is performed. The configuration may be as follows as a specific example.
(1) Game end timing (timing when the third stop button is turned on → off, display determination timing, payout completion timing based on winning, a command related to game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S side as game end processing) The game does not proceed from the timing, the timing at which the command relating to the end of the game is received by the sub-control board S side (there is no new bet operation, no automatic bet operation based on the new game stop display, a new start) If a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed with no operation of the lever, no new rotation of the reel, etc., the menu screen may be displayed (the sub input button SB may be operated until then). Menu screen is not displayed.) The bet operation includes both a case where a bet is made by operating the bet button D220 and a case where a game medal is inserted into the medal slot D170 and a bet is made (the automatic bet based on the re-game stop display). May be included in the betting operation).
(2-1) The menu screen may not be displayed during the execution of the game (while a game medal is bet, during the wait period until the start of reel rotation, and during reel rotation).
(2-2) A menu screen may be displayed during execution of a game (eg, a game medal is bet).
(3) During the execution of a predetermined effect (during the execution of an effect that notifies whether or not a bonus has been won, during the execution of a continuous effect that is executed over a plurality of games, an effect that notifies whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the number of AT games) , Etc.) may be configured not to be in a menu screen displayable state.
(4) A configuration may be made so that the menu screen display is not enabled while the replay is stopped.
In order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the menu screen can be displayed, the sub input button SB (an LED provided inside the sub input button SB) is displayed when the menu screen can be displayed. You may comprise so that it may blink.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7104, in step 7106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the sub input button SB has been operated. In this example, the operation of displaying the menu screen is the operation of the sub input button SB. However, the operation of displaying the menu screen may be changed, or a plurality of operations of displaying the menu screen may be configured. . If Yes in step 7106, in step 7108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a menu screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7109, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer (timer for measuring the time required to shift from the game end timing to the standby screen described later) and clears the timer value to zero. Next, in step 7110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer clocking flag (a flag that is turned on when the waiting timer is counting). Next, in step 7111, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S measures the menu standby timer (a timer for measuring the transition time from the menu screen to a standby screen to be described later). Is set) to a predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example, which is longer than a predetermined time A described later), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the menu standby timer timing flag (a flag that is turned on when the menu standby timer is counting), and performs the next process (the process of step 7200). Move to

In step 7114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the menu screen end condition is satisfied. The menu screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the menu screen, in other words, a condition for switching the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device S40 from the menu screen to another screen (image). May be configured as follows.
(1) It may be configured to be satisfied when a bet operation is newly performed, a start lever is newly operated, and reel rotation is newly started.
(2) In a situation where the menu screen is continuously displayed, the condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time (in this example, 300 seconds, which is the predetermined time B) has elapsed from the start of displaying the menu screen.
(3) It may be configured such that a predetermined item on the menu screen is selected and determined, and a predetermined operation is performed on a screen corresponding to the predetermined item to be satisfied. By operating the sub input button SB, a screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is displayed. After operating the cross key SB2 to adjust to a desired volume, operating the sub input button SB again to select The volume is set to the medium size, the display of the menu screen ends, and a screen before the menu screen is displayed (sometimes referred to as a normal screen) is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of Yes in step 7114, in step 7116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed on the effect display device S40 before the menu screen is displayed. As an example, if the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in a situation where the screen where the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, when the display of the menu screen ends, The screen where the hero is walking in the forest will be displayed. Next, in step 7118, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7120, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 7200).

  If No in step 7114, in step 7122, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 has been operated. If Yes in step 7122, in step 7124, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets the menu standby timer to the predetermined time B (300 seconds in this example), and proceeds to the next process (the process in step 7200). I do. Note that also in the case of No in step 7104, step 7106, or step 7122, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 7200). As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 is operated while the menu screen is displayed, the menu standby timer sets the predetermined time B (300 in this example). ) Is reset, in other words, the measurement of the time until the standby screen is displayed is restarted from the beginning. In this example, two timers, a standby timer and a menu standby timer, are used as timers for displaying the standby screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Only one timer for displaying the standby screen is used. It may be configured to be used. Specifically, only the standby timer is used as a timer related to the display of the standby screen, and the predetermined time A (180 seconds) set in the standby timer and the predetermined time B (300 seconds) set in the menu standby timer are set in standby. You may comprise so that it may set to a timer. As a specific example, the predetermined time A (180 seconds) is set in the standby timer when the third stop button is changed from ON to OFF, and then, when the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the sub input button SB is operated. Then, when the display of the menu screen is started, a predetermined time B (300 seconds) may be set in the standby timer.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the standby screen display control process according to the subroutine of step 7200 in FIG. 41 in the present embodiment. First, in step 7202, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby screen is not displayed. Here, the standby screen is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device SG when it is determined that the game has not been executed for a predetermined time (the game has not progressed), and the standby screen of the effect executed by the gaming machine A moving image related to the story is repeatedly played back, a display of "power saving" is displayed, and a logo mark related to the game machine maker is displayed. In this example, the operation of the player is required as a condition for displaying the above-described menu screen, but the operation of the player is not required as a condition for displaying the standby screen.

  In the case of Yes in step 7202, in step 7204, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the standby timer counting flag (a flag that is turned on when a standby timer described later is counting) is off. I do. If Yes in step 7204, in step 7206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game end timing has been reached. In this processing, the timing at which the third stop button is turned from on to off is set as the game end timing. If Yes in step 7206, in step 7208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S measures the standby timer (a timer for measuring the time required to shift to the standby screen from the end of the game, and the initial value is set at the timing when the game ends). ) Is set to a predetermined time A (180 seconds in this example, which is shorter than the predetermined time B described above), and the timer is started. Next, in step 7210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the standby timer counting flag, and proceeds to step 7212. In the present embodiment, the condition for executing the processing of step 7208 and step 7210 is that the game end timing has been reached. Accordingly, the condition that the image displayed before the display of the menu screen is displayed (the display of the menu screen is ended) may be used as a condition.

  Next, in step 7212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7212, in step 7214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to step 7216. Next, in step 7216, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7218, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7220, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in Step 7222, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to Step 7224. It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 7206, the process shifts to step 7224.

  Next, in step 7224, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the menu waiting timer counting flag is on. If Yes in step 7224, in step 7226, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the timer value of the menu standby timer has become 0. If Yes in step 7226, in step 7228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a standby screen on the effect display device S40. Next, in step 7230, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the menu standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7232, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the menu standby timer counting flag. Next, in step 7234, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the standby timer and clears it to zero. Next, in step 7236, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the waiting timer counting flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2110). It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 7224 or Step 7226, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of Step 2110).

  If No in step 7204, in other words, if the standby timer timing flag is on, in step 7238, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby timer timing end condition is satisfied. I do. Here, the standby timer timing end condition is a condition for terminating the timing of the standby timer and clearing the timer value of the standby timer to zero, and there is a new bet operation and a new start lever operation. In addition, a new start of reel rotation and the like are the conditions for terminating the counting of the standby timer. If Yes in step 7238, the process moves to step 7212, while if No in step 7238, the process moves to step 7216.

  Further, in the case of No in Step 7202, in Step 7240, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby screen end condition is satisfied. Here, the standby screen end condition is a condition for ending the display of the standby screen, and in this example, there is a new bet operation, a new start lever operation, and a new reel rotation. "Started" is the standby screen end condition. It should be noted that a configuration is possible in which a transition from the standby screen to the menu screen can be made (a menu screen is displayed). For example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub input button SB while the standby screen is displayed. Such a configuration may be adopted. Next, in Step 7242, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the image displayed before the display of the standby screen on the effect display device S40, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2110). As an example, in a situation where a screen in which the hero is walking in the forest is displayed, if the standby screen is displayed because the A game has not progressed for a predetermined time, the bet operation is performed to execute the bet operation again. Is displayed in the forest.

  Next, FIG. 58 is an image diagram of transition to a standby screen according to the present embodiment. First, in the case of (a), the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB in the menu screen display enabled state. Thereafter, in a situation where the menu screen is displayed, five minutes (the predetermined time B and 300 seconds) elapse without operating the sub input button SB or the bet button D220, and a standby screen is displayed. Next, in the case of (b), the game is executed, the player stops the reels, and all the reels are stopped by performing a stop operation of the third stop button, and the player presses the third stop button. Three minutes (180 seconds, which is the predetermined time A) have passed since the release timing, and since the sub input button SB and the bet button D220 have not been operated during that time, the standby screen is displayed. As described above, in this example, a case where a predetermined time B has elapsed since the menu screen was displayed, and a case where the predetermined time A has elapsed since the game was ended (after the third stop button was turned on → off). , The standby screen can be displayed, and the predetermined time B is longer than the predetermined time A.

<< Configuration of menu screen and standby screen applicable to this example >>
Here, a configuration regarding a menu screen and a standby screen applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below, including the configuration of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the configurations listed below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and that one or a plurality of them can be appropriately combined without any problem.

<Timing start timing of standby timer>
The initial value is set in the standby timer that measures the time until the standby screen is displayed, and the timing to start timing is as follows: (1) The third stop button (the stop corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) as the final stop operation Button) is turned on and then turned off, (2) the time is started from the execution timing of the display determination, (3) the time is started from the payout completion timing based on the winning, and (4) the game. Timing is started from the timing at which a command related to the game end is set or transmitted to the sub-control board S as the end processing. (5) The timing is started from the timing at which the command related to the game end is received by the sub-control board S. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time A (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds) may be set as an initial value.

<Timing start timing of the menu standby timer>
The timing is started from the timing when the menu screen is displayed by operating the sub input button SB as the timing for setting the initial value to the menu standby timer for measuring the time until the menu screen is displayed and for starting the timing. May be. Alternatively, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu standby timer, for example, 300 seconds) may be set as an initial value. The predetermined time B set in the menu standby timer is longer than the predetermined time A set in the standby timer (a timer value set in the standby timer, for example, 180 seconds).

<Configuration of sub input button>
In a situation where the menu standby timer is counting, the menu standby timer may be configured so that the initial value can be reset. For example, operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 while the menu screen is displayed Thus, a predetermined time B (a timer value set in the menu waiting timer, for example, 300 seconds) which is an initial value may be set in the menu waiting timer. For example, when the menu screen is started to be displayed, the menu standby timer is set to 300 seconds, and the timer is started. After 100 seconds, when the timer value of the menu standby timer is 200 seconds, the cross key SB2 is pressed. The operation may be configured so that 300 seconds is reset in the menu standby timer by the operation. The menu screen can be started to be displayed by operating the sub input button SB. When the menu screen is being displayed (the display is started by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the menu screen is started). By operating the cross key SB at the transition destination screen where the transition has occurred, the menu standby timer may be operated to reset the initial value to the menu standby timer. By operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB on the transition destination screen to which the screen has transitioned by operating the sub input button SB or the cross key SB2 after the screen display is started) A configuration may be made so that an initial value can be reset in the menu waiting timer.

<Configuration of stop button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, the bet operation is not performed. Even if the stop button (the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button) is operated in the situation, the initial value may not be reset in the standby timer. As an example, as a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, 180 seconds is set in the standby timer, and the timer starts counting. Thereafter, in a situation where the bet operation is not performed and the timer value of the standby timer is 100 seconds, the timer value of the standby timer is not reset again even if the stop button is operated, and the timer value is 100 seconds. It may be configured to remain as it is.

<Configuration related to betting operation>
When a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off as a final stop operation in a situation where the standby timer is counting, and then a bet operation is performed ( When the bet is operated by operating the bet button D220 or when a game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot D170 and the bet is placed), the timer of the standby timer is stopped and the timer value is cleared to zero. That is, in a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, a bet operation is executed. If no other operation is performed, the standby screen may not be displayed due to the passage of time. Note that in such a configuration, the standby screen is not displayed due to the lapse of time since the betting operation, but the volume of the sound being output when a specific time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the betting operation. May be set to 0 or smaller. With such a configuration, the number of remaining game medals becomes less than a prescribed number (for example, three) (for example, one), and the remaining one game medal is bet (for example, a bet button is operated). When the game is finished, or when the player finishes the game with no game medals remaining in the credits less than the specified number (the bet is not placed), the clerk at the game hall cleans the gaming machine by using the bet button. , The sound is not output at an unintended volume.

<Display condition of standby screen>
The standby screen may be displayed on condition that the timer value of the decrement timer (in this example, the standby timer or the menu standby timer) related to the display of the standby screen changes from “1 → 0”. With this configuration, the timer value reaches “0” without going through “1”, such as “20 → 0”, when a bet operation is performed or some abnormality occurs in timer measurement. In this case (when cleared to zero), the standby screen is not displayed, and the display of the unintended standby screen can be prevented (the timer value is reset and then changed from “1 → 0”). In such a case, a standby screen may be displayed. A flag for displaying the standby screen may be provided, and the standby screen may be displayed when the flag is turned on.

<Structure related to checkout button>
In a situation where the standby timer is counting, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, one or more credits exist. In the situation, when the settlement button is operated to execute the settlement of the credit, a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the operation timing of the settlement button or the timing at which the settlement of the credit is completed (the last game medal is executed). The standby screen may be displayed at the timing of returning to the discharge port D240).

<Configuration of setting key switch>
As a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that is rotating to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned from off to on when the power is on. The standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing. In addition, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and then the front door is opened while the power is on. A standby screen may be displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the setting key switch was turned on from off to on and then the front door was closed.

<Configuration related to occurrence of predetermined error>
As a final stop operation, a third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, and thereafter, a predetermined error relating to the main control board M side (for example, a game medal When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing at which the predetermined error is released, a standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration of front door>
As a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, and the open state is opened. May be configured to continue counting the time of the standby timer even when the time is maintained. Also, as a final stop operation, the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on and then turned off, so that the standby timer starts timing, and then the front door is opened, Thereafter, even when the front door is closed, the timing of the standby timer may be continued.

<Configuration 1 during AT>
In a situation where the non-AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (e.g., 180 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of the stop, the standby screen can be displayed, and the final stop operation is performed in a situation where the AT is being performed (e.g., the state relating to the AT is "AT in progress"). The standby screen is not displayed when a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed since the third stop button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) was turned on and then turned off. May be. Similarly, even during the execution of the continuous effect, the execution of the bonus, and the ART, the standby screen may not be displayed even if the predetermined time A has elapsed after the end of the final stop operation. Further, in the situation where the AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is “the AT being performed state”), a third stop button (corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is determined as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation is executed. When a predetermined time A (for example, 180 seconds) elapses from the timing when the stop button was turned on after being turned on, the standby screen is not displayed, and the AT is being displayed (for example, the state related to the AT is "AT in state"). In the situation where the third order button (the stop button corresponding to the reel rotating to the end) is turned on as the final stop operation in the game in which the push order navigation has not been executed, a predetermined time has elapsed since the turn off. When A (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed, a standby screen may be displayed.

<Configuration 2 during AT>
When a menu screen is displayed by operating a sub input button or the like in a situation where an AT is being performed (for example, the state related to the AT is “AT being performed”), (1) a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) has elapsed. , The standby screen can be displayed, and (2) the normal screen during AT (the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed) is restored when a predetermined time B (for example, 300 seconds) elapses. You may.

<Configuration 3 during AT>
In a situation where the non-AT is being performed (for example, the state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), the third stop button (a stop button corresponding to the reel that has been rotated to the end) is turned on as a final stop operation, and then turned off. When a predetermined time A (for example, 60 seconds) elapses from the timing set in the above, a standby screen can be displayed, and in a situation where a non-AT is being performed (for example, a state relating to the AT is a “normal game state”), A menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time B (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the menu screen, a standby screen can be displayed. ), The menu screen is displayed, and when a predetermined time C (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the menu screen display, the normal screen during AT (display before the menu screen is displayed). May be configured to return to that have been screen) it is. That is, when the time values are compared, “the predetermined time A = the predetermined time B <the predetermined time C” may be configured. Note that the time values of the predetermined time A and the predetermined time B do not have to be the same, and the predetermined time C may be the longest.

<Other Configuration 1>
A menu screen may be displayed by inserting game medals from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed. Note that the menu screen displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal insertion slot D170 while the standby screen is displayed includes (1) the same screen as the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button; A) a screen displayed by performing a predetermined operation from the menu screen displayed by operating the sub input button (selecting and determining a predetermined item); (3) operating the sub input button It may be configured as a screen different from the displayed menu screen. Further, even if a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the menu screen is displayed by inserting a game medal from the medal slot D170 during the display of the standby screen, the menu screen continues to be displayed. If a game medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 while the menu screen displayed by operating the input button is displayed, the screen may return to the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed. When a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 and a bet is made during the display of the standby screen, a menu screen is displayed. When a bet is operated by operating a bet button while the standby screen is displayed, the menu screen is displayed before the menu screen is displayed. (A normal screen displayed during a game when the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on) may be displayed. Further, when a game medal is inserted from the medal slot D170 while the standby screen is being displayed and a bet is placed, a menu screen is displayed, the standby screen is displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is the specified number. In the above situation, when a bet is operated by operating a bet button (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation), the screen displayed before the menu screen is displayed (the standby screen is displayed immediately after the power is turned on). Is displayed, the normal screen displayed during the game is displayed), the standby screen is being displayed, and the number of game medals stored in the credit is less than the specified number of three, and the bet button is displayed. A menu screen may be displayed when a bet is made by operating (for example, a max bet button that allows three bets by one operation).

<Other configuration 2>
It has a plurality of display modes of the standby screen, and satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, by entering a password on the menu screen, it may be set as a predetermined condition that a game is taken over from the previous game history and taken over). If not, a moving image for introducing a story is displayed as a standby screen, but if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a moving image for introducing a character may be displayed as a standby screen. . Further, in both the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied and the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the story introduction and the character introduction can be displayed as a standby screen. It may be configured such that the frequency of displaying either the story introduction or the character introduction differs depending on whether or not it is displayed.

<Other changes>
In the present example, the first BB role in which the first BB is executed by winning, and the second BB role in which the second BB which is less profitable for the player than the first BB is executed by winning, are provided. It may be configured so that the first BB combination and the second BB combination can be elected twice (the combination of “1 BB + 2 BB” is provided). With such a configuration, when the “1st BB + 2nd BB” is won, the symbol combination (1st BB combination) corresponding to the execution of the high profit 1BB can be stopped and displayed, and after the execution of the 1st BB, The symbol combination (second BB combination) corresponding to 2BB may be stopped and displayed (while the first BB is being executed, the fact that the second BB has been won is carried over). When the first BB + second BB is won, by executing the high profit first BB first, for example, in a situation where the closing time of the game hall is approaching, the first BB + second BB is won. In this case, the low profit second BB is executed first, and the game hall is closed during the execution of the second BB, and the game must be ended without executing the high profit first BB. Can be prevented.

  After the operation of the first BB is completed, the winning of the second BB may be immediately notified, or may be notified after the hiding (after a predetermined game has elapsed without notifying), and the hiding configuration is adopted. In such a case, the probability of winning a re-game may be increased during the incubation period after the operation of the first BB is completed. Further, when hiding, an effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB may be executed (for example, “BB consecutive villa chance time !!” is displayed on the effect display device S40). . In such a configuration, unless the case where the second BB is not won after the end of the first BB is not provided, it is definite that the effect generation = the second BB has been won, so that only the first BB is won. However, it is preferable that an effect indicating the possibility of winning of the second BB is executed even after the operation of the first BB is completed (the effect mode after the end of the first BB is the same as that described above). For example, "BB consecutive villa chance time !!" is displayed on the effect display device S40). In addition, even if the first BB is won only and the first BB is won again after the operation of the first BB is completed, the execution of the effect indicating the possibility of winning the second BB is not stopped. You may. Furthermore, after the first BB winning is informed once, the first BB winning may be notified (for example, “BB consecutive villa chance time !!” is displayed → “Sorry” → “No. 1BB winning! " Furthermore, when the second BB is hidden after the operation of the first BB is completed after the winning in the AT and the operation of the first BB is completed, the effect display device S40 returns to the AT after the AT is being prepared or the like. The number of remaining games may be reduced, but the internal number of remaining games may be continuously interrupted. When the first BB and the second BB are won twice, the payout number from the start of the operation of the first BB to the end of the operation of the second BB may be accumulated and displayed on the effect display device S40 or the like.

In this example,
(1) When the first BB and the small winning combination A win over and over, the stop control is performed with priority given to the first BB.
(2) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, stop control is performed with priority given to the small win B.
That is, there may be provided a small combination for performing stop control with priority over the BB combination, and a small combination for performing stop control with priority over the BB combination.
(3) When the first BB and the small win A are overlapped, when the small win A wins or a part of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small win A (for example, at the first stop, When the second stop is stopped, a notification corresponding to the small combination A (a notification that the small combination A can win) is performed.
In other words, the notification of the first BB combination that should normally be controlled prior to the small combination A is reported as a result of the first or second stop (a stop mode after the execution of the first or second stop). Accordingly, when the first BB combination cannot be won (regardless of the position where the third stop is stopped), the notification corresponding to the small combination A is performed. When the small win A wins as a result of the game, a notification corresponding to the small win A is issued. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the most advantageous notification to the player according to various game situations that change during the game, and to compare the content notified by the effect display device S40 and the like with the actual content. It is possible to prevent inconsistent winning combinations.
(4) When the first BB and the small win B are won twice, a notification corresponding to the small win B is made during rotation of all reels.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a display (such as 7-segment) for displaying the number of the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed, which is controlled by the main control board M, is provided. In such a configuration, the effect display device S40 performs a contradictory effect that does not correspond to the symbol (or symbol combination) stopped and displayed. For example, when the symbol combination of replay-replay-replay is stopped on the activated line, an effect that is likely to be output when a watermelon is won (for example, a lamp is lit in green) is executed.

In this example, an earphone jack that can output (cannot input) from the sub-control board S side may be provided, and may have the following features.
(1) The volume output from the earphone jack can be selected from a plurality of levels using the sub input button of the gaming machine.
(2) Even when a game is played using the earphone jack, when an error occurs, an error notification sound is output from the gaming machine at a predetermined volume (for example, output from a speaker provided in the gaming machine). ).
(3) When playing a game using the earphone jack, an error notification sound is output from the earphone jack at a predetermined volume other than the maximum volume even when the maximum volume is selected.

  In addition, during the AT state or during the execution of the BB, the effect sound may be output from the gaming machine even when playing a game using the earphone jack. Further, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is not used and the sound volume for when the earphone jack is not used may be separately stored. Even when the earphone is unplugged, the sound volume for when the earphone jack is used may not be cleared (to the initial value) immediately. For example, when there is no operation for 10 minutes, any volume may be cleared (to the initial value). However, when the earphone is still inserted, the volume for use of the earphone jack does not have to be cleared (to the initial value). The earphone jack is preferably provided at a place where it does not interfere with the game (for example, when the earphone is inserted into the earphone jack, the earphone cord is not entangled with the player's arm when trying to operate the start lever) ).

In this example,
(1) The winning probability of the re-gaming role can be changed between after the BB ends when the number of the specified number or more is obtained during the execution of the BB and after the BB ends when the number of the obtained number or less is obtained. You may comprise.
(2) There may be a plurality of RT states to which a transition is made when an RT state (for example, RT1) with a relatively high winning probability of a re-gaming role ends. For example, it may be configured to shift to “RT0” after the end of “RT1” or to shift to “RT3” (a newly provided RT state).
(3) When a predetermined combination is won, the RT state is shifted. That is, the transition of the RT state does not correspond one-to-one with the prize, but transitions at a constant probability regardless of the condition device and the prize (for example, the RT transition lottery is executed at a constant probability for each game).
(4) It is possible to mount a zero-course RT transition, win a zero-copies repeatedly, and win a double-copies. That is, no matter which pressing order, even if the stop operation is performed at any position, 0 or more winning combinations in which one or more winning combinations do not win are provided, and the RT state shifts due to the winning of the 0 winning combinations. It is also possible to configure so that it is possible to obtain a winning combination of the zero-copies and the seven-copies, or a double-winning of the zero-copies A and the zero-copies B. It should be noted that at the time of the winning of the zero-copies, any of the zero-copies which shift to RT and the zero-copies which do not shift to RT may be configured to win depending on the pressing order. It is also possible to win a winning combination with a winning combination of zero and a winning combination of BB, giving priority to the winning combination of zero.

  In addition, as in this example, the pressing order of the pressing order bell is 6 choices (“left → middle → right”, “left → right → middle”, “middle → left → right”, “middle → right → left”, (Right → Left → Middle), “Right → Middle → Left”, and the push order of the push order replay is three choices (first stop is left, middle, right three choices) In this case, as the push order display in the push order display device D270, the push order navigation display related to the push order bell and the push order navigation display related to the push order replay are different, in other words, the 6-select push order navigation. The display may be different from the three-selection push order navigation display. As an example, as the pressing order display related to 6 selections, “= 1” in the case of “left → middle → right”, “= 2” in the case of “left → right → middle”, and “middle → left → “= 3” for “right”, “= 4” for “middle → right → left”, “= 5” for “right → left → middle”, “right → middle → left” In the case of, the display is like “= 6”, and as the pressing order display related to the three selections, “= 7” when the first stop is on the left, and “= 8” when the first stop is middle. In the case where the first stop is on the right, the display may be such as “= 9”.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows.
(1) The number of AT digested games, which is the number of games continuously digested in the “AT-in-state”, “specialized precursor state”, or “additional specialized state”, can be displayed on the effect display device. If the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the game shifts from the "AT state" to the "normal game state" and then wins the AT lottery again within the specified game and shifts to the "AT state", the previous AT While the number of digested games is taken over and added, the "advantage section" continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), so that the state shifts from the "AT-in-game state" to the "normal gaming state" and then re-entered within the specific game. When the player wins the AT lottery and shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”, the number of AT digestion games is counted from 0 games again without inheriting the previous AT digestion game number.
(2) If the stop button is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel starts rotating, a display prompting the user to stop the reel on the effect display device S40 (for example, “Reel If you do not operate the stop button for a predetermined time after the reel starts spinning in the game in which the push order navigation occurs, (2-1) production The display area of the push order navigation display on the display device S40 does not overlap with the display for prompting to stop the reels, and (2-2) the display for prompting to stop the reels is not displayed.
(3) When the power is changed from “on → off → on” in a game in which the push order navigation is generated, the rotation speed of the reels becomes constant and the operation of the stop button becomes effective before the stop button becomes effective. At this timing, the push order navigation (display on the push order display device D270 and / or display on the effect display device S40) is displayed again.
(4) The state related to a certain AT differs from the state related to another AT in the frequency at which the push order navigation occurs in the game in which the common bell is won, or the AT related state in which the push order navigation can occur. The state related to a certain AT and the state related to another AT in which the push order navigation can occur are different in the frequency of occurrence of the push order navigation in the game in which the common bell is won.
(5) In the case of the RT state (in this example, "RT1") in which the winning probability of the replay is the highest, the ratio of the game in which the push order navigation occurs is higher than the ratio of the game in which the push order navigation does not occur. high. For example, the combined winning rate of the bell role and the replaying role is 1/2 or more. With this configuration, the player can proceed with the game without getting tired during the AT.
The configuration may be as described above.

  Here, the characteristic points of the above-described game section will be described in detail below.

≪Normal section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) Except during the BB internal winning and during the execution of the BB, the shift lottery to the “advantageous section” can be executed.

≪Standby section≫
(1) The push order navigation is not displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation is not displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) related to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order is not transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) The transfer lottery to the “advantageous section” is not executed.
(5) After the BB wins in the “standby state”, the “advantageous section” starts from the next game.

≪Advantaged section≫
(1) The push order navigation can be displayed on the push order display device D270.
(2) The pressing order navigation can be displayed on the effect display device S40.
(3) A command (signal) relating to a condition device that causes a difference in the profit rate of the player depending on the pressing order can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side.
(4) A lottery that changes the performance of the “advantageous section” (for example, a transition from a “high probability state” to an “in-AT state” as an AT-related state), an additional number of AT games, and the like can be executed.
(5) During the “advantageous section”, the advantageous section indicator YH is constantly lit.
(6) When the counter value of the advantageous section remaining game number counter YKc-1 becomes 0, unless the BB or the push order navigation is executed at least once in the "advantage section", the "advantage section" is basically used. However, as an exception, when the “advantageous section” continues for a predetermined number of games (in this example, 1500), the BB and the push order navigation are performed once in the “advantageous section”. Is configured so that the “advantageous section” can end even if the execution is not performed.
(7) The measurement of the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game counter YKc-1 is executed in all the games in the “advantageous section” (for example, each game counter value is added even during BB execution).

Here, the characteristic points related to the setting lottery for the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The presence or absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is determined based on the result of the role lottery, and the presence or absence of the setting for the “advantageous section” is not determined when the number of games elapses.
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established depending on the set value, the setting lottery for the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established.
(3) In the case where a certain condition device is established and the set lottery for the "advantageous section" is executed, the lottery probability is the same even if the set values are different.
(4) The performance of the “advantageous section” does not differ depending on the set value (for example, when a strong cherry is established, the setting 1 shifts to the “high-probability state” and the setting 6 shifts to the “AT-in-progress state”. Etc. does not differ depending on the set value).
(5) Setting to “Advantaged Section” When the lottery is won, basically, the next game is set to “Advantaged Section”. If the lottery is won, the next game may be a “standby section”.)

Here, the characteristic points related to the change in the performance of the “advantageous section” will be described in detail below.
(1) The lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” with reference to the set value is not executed (a condition common to all set values may be that a predetermined number of games elapse and a predetermined condition device is established). .
(2) When a condition device having a different lottery probability is established according to the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantage section” is not executed when the condition device is established. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(3) When BB is internally won, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantageous section” is not executed. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(4) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed differs depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantage section” during the BB execution Does not run. No lottery or the like is added to the number of AT games.
(5) During the BB execution, if the lottery probability of the BB combination that triggered the BB being executed does not differ depending on the set value, the lottery for changing the performance of the “advantage section” during the BB execution Can be performed. A lottery or the like with the number of AT games added can also be executed.

  Further, the following configuration may be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Further, the following configuration may be applied alone, or a plurality of configurations may be combined.

<< Point 1 >>
(1) It is configured to have a “gase high probability state” as a state relating to an AT that is an “advantageous section” but is harder to win the AT lottery than the “high probability state”.
(2) The continuous effect is constituted by at least a predetermined number of consecutive games equal to or more than the number of G's.
(3) It has a normal role that does not win 100% in the AT lottery and a special role that wins 100% in the AT lottery. When a continuous production is executed with the normal role as an opportunity and the AT lottery is not won. In this case, if the special role is won during the continuous production, a production to notify that the player has won the AT lottery is executed even during the continuous production (replacement of the continuous production).
(4) The higher the number of remaining games with high security failure games, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with high expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning), and the remaining games with high security failure games. The smaller the number is, the higher the probability of selecting a continuous production with a low degree of expectation.
(5) The probability of selecting an effect that completes one game with a higher degree of expectation (expectation of bonus winning, expectation of AT lottery winning) is higher as the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure is smaller.
(6) When the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 4 games), continuous production of losing is not executed, but continuous production of winning (bonus winning, AT lottery winning) is performed. Can be performed. In other words, when the remaining number of games with a high security failure is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, four games), the effect of completing one game can be executed in the case of a loss or a hit, but the continuous effect is performed in the case of a hit. Can only be performed if.
(7) When the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined value (4 games) up to the number of ceilings G (1500 games), the continuous effect is not executed.
(8) The tendency to select an effect is different between the case where the number of ceilings G in the advantageous section is equal to or less than a predetermined value and the case where it is larger than the predetermined value (frequency of occurrence of continuous effects, degree of expectation of big hit of predetermined effects, etc.).
(9) In the case of a new transition to the “advantageous section” in the middle of a continuous production of losses (for example, a defeating production) in the “normal section”,
(9-1) Rewrite the continuous production (stage change production in the “advantageous section” transition game, such as “When you turn around, there is a character and Stechen suggests words”). The rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (defeat) is higher than the rate at which effects are rewritten during continuous production (victory).
(9-2) Change the stay stage after executing the continuous production to the end. The ratio of notifying that the transition has been made on the sub-control board S side in the game when the transition to the “advantageous section” during the execution of the continuous production, The rate at which the control board S side notifies that the shift has occurred is different.

<< Point 2 >>
(1) A stay stage (stage A group) that can be set in the “normal section” is configured to be selectable by the player. For example, selection can be made by operating a sub input button.
(2) 1: A lottery result of whether or not the staying stage A group is in the “advantageous section” is notified in advance when the start lever is turned on in the game,
2: The lottery result of whether or not the staying stage A group is in the "advantageous section" is notified later when the game ends (or at the time of the next game bet (the start lever is operated when the replay stop display is displayed)).
(3) When the state becomes the “normal section” from the staying stage other than the “advantageous section” and the staying stage A group, the staying stage is selected from the staying stage A group. When the state becomes the “normal section” from the state of the staying stage other than the “advantageous section” and the effect A group, the staying stage is maintained.
(4) The AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and the staying stage A group is different from the AT expectation when the advantageous section indicator is off and other than the staying stage A group. For example, since the AT expectation is low, “the advantageous section indicator is turned off and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and the staying stage A group → the advantageous section indicator is turned on and other than the staying stage A group”
(5) The transition of the staying stage (staying stage A group → staying stage B group) triggered by the effect (including the 1G-completed effect and the continuous effect) in the game that has changed from the “normal section” to the “advantageous section” The ratio of occurrence of the stay stage differs from the ratio of occurrence of the transition to the stay stage triggered by the effect in the game in which the transition from the “advantageous section” to the “normal section”.

<< Point 3 >>
(1) The greater the number of guaranteed games in the “advantageous section” (the number of games remaining in the number of games with high security failure), the higher the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for winning the AT lottery and the degree of expectation for winning the bonus). The higher the probability of selecting the staying stage and the smaller the number of guaranteed games in the "advantageous section" (the number of remaining games of the number of games with high security failure), the higher the expected degree (the expected degree and the bonus that has been won in the AT lottery). Probability of selecting a stay stage with a high degree of expectation).
(2) When the number of remaining guaranteed games in the “advantage section” is equal to or less than a predetermined value (four games or less), the smaller the number of remaining guaranteed games, the lower the probability of selecting an effect in which the stay stage shifts.
(3) If an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected in a situation where the user is not staying at a stay stage with a high degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of winning an AT lottery, the degree of expectation of winning a bonus), the degree of expectation is determined. Expectation (AT lottery winning), Expectation (bonus winning) Expectations are high, and the bonuses are high).

<< Point 4 >>
(1) If you win the BB in the "Resurrection availability stage",
(1-1) It is possible to execute the lottery with the AT added during the BB or not.
(1-2) After the BB ends, the state may shift to the “AT-in-progress state” or may not shift.
(1-3) During the BB, an AT addition lottery may or may not be executed.
(1-4) When the state shifts to the “AT state” after the end of the BB, the number of remaining AT games may or may not be reduced by one game in the “resurrection feasibility effect state”.
(2) In the “state of resurrection possibility effect”, an AT-additional lottery may or may not be executed. If you run a lottery with AT,
(3) In the "state of resurrection possibility production", when the player wins the replay of seven reverse push whites or the seven replay of forward push blacks, an avoidance navigation occurs, and at the timing after executing the resurrection performance (success). Notify the number of additional games.
(4) If a winning combination that can shift to the “advantageous section” is won in the “resurrection possibility effect state”, the advantage section indicator turns off at the start timing of the next game, while the “resurrection possibility effect state” In the case where a winning combination that can shift to the “advantageous section” is won in the next game when the resurrection lottery has not been won, the advantageous section indicator may be turned on at the start timing of the next game.
(5) In the case of a specification where the lottery is not performed on the AT in the advantageous section but in the "revival state",
(5-1) The number of AT games is not added even if a role (for example, watermelon A) that can execute an AT addition lottery in the “state of resurrection availability effect” in the “state for resilience effect effect” is not added, but 1G for executing the resurrection effect (success) If a winning combination (for example, watermelon A) is won in the ("AT state"), the number of AT games can be increased.
(6) When "Battle effect 3G + Resurrection effect (failure) 1G" is scheduled to be executed as an effect at the end of the AT, a bonus when the resurrection effect (success) is executed by winning a bonus in the resurrection effect execution game AT game number is not added during the game, but the AT game number is added during the bonus when the bonus is won and the resurrection effect (success) is executed in the battle effect execution game (any of 3G) I can do it. Moreover, the production tendency during the bonus may be different.

<< Point 5 >>
(1) When the game state A and the game state B are included as states relating to the AT which is an “advantage section”,
(1-1) The expected degree of winning in the AT addition lottery is “gaming state A> advantageous state B” (the number of AT games is more likely to be added in the gaming state A than in the gaming state B or the AT added game). a lot).
(1-2) The additional number that can be added when the player X is won in the gaming state A is different from the additional number that can be added when the player Y is won in the gaming state A.
(1-3) The additional number that can be added when winning the role X in the gaming state B is the same as the additional number that can be added when winning the role Y in the gaming state B.

<< Point 6 >>
(1) The display modes of the fall avoidance suggestion display are as follows: when the start lever is operated (A), after the first stop to before the second stop (B), and after the second stop to before the third stop (C). To make a difference.
(1-1) The display mode of the fall avoidance suggestion display is in the order of “A <B <C” from the one that is inconspicuous for the player.
(2) In the case where the state is changed from the “AT in progress state” and the “RT1” state to the “low probability state” and the “RT1” state in which the AT is completed, when the winning combination is won, the pushing is performed by the pushing order display device. The navigation order is displayed, but in the effect display device, the navigation order is not displayed ("???" is displayed).
(3) When the winning 18 (falling hand) is won at the third stop in the game in which the fall avoidance suggestion display is displayed, the display is maintained in the same display manner as that after the second stop. .
(4) When returning from power-off and operating the start lever in a state in which the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device is not completed, the start lever is operated more than the completion of the initial processing related to the display of the effect display device. At the previous timing, the push order navigation is executed by the sound from the speaker (for example, “Left!”).
(5) Even if the player is in a state related to an AT that is highly profitable for the player, such as “additional specialization state”, if the player has won the fall role, the fall avoidance suggestion effect is displayed with priority.
(6) Even if a falling role wins in the “advantageous section”, the “advantageous section” is maintained.
(7) In the case where the falling hand is configured to be a pushing role (determining whether or not to stop and display according to the pushing sequence), a winning role (a pushing sequence bell or the like) which is not a falling role is won, and the pushing sequence is performed. When the navigation is executed and stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation, the display of the staging display device may darken, but when the fall role is won, the display is stopped in the pressing order different from the pressing order navigation. In this case, the display of the effect display device does not darken (or does not darken to the display of the effect to suggest a fall avoidance).

<< Point 7 >>
(1) In the case where it is configured to shift to “RT3” and “AT preparation state” after the BB related to the BB having the setting difference (similar to the first modification from the present embodiment).
(1-1) By winning a winning combination with a high probability in "RT3", an AT-added lottery is won (100% may be won or a predetermined probability may be won).
(1-2) The RT state to be shifted to after the end of the BB is made different depending on the type of BB combination, and the AT addition lottery execution mode (additional lottery execution role, addition) The lottery winning probability and the number of AT added games) are made different.
(1-3) The bonus A → RT1 → promotional replay A → RT3 (high replay probability), the bonus B → RT2 → promotional replay B → RT3 The winning rate or the number of added games is different.
(1-4) When the bonus A → RT1, the bonus B → RT2, and the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B are included, the winning probability of the promotion replay A and the promotion replay B at RT1 and RT2 is Different.
(1-5) Bonus A → RT1, Bonus B → RT2, so that promotion replay and fall replay can be won, respectively, and the winning probability of promotion replay and fall replay is different between RT1 and RT2.
(1-6) After completion of BB with setting difference, the state shifts to the dedicated RT state (“RT3” and “AT preparation state”), and then shifts to the “additional specialization state” triggered by the promotion replay.

<< Point 8 >>
(1) One type of BB-B1 and one type of BB-B2 are provided. After the completion of one type of BB-B1, the process proceeds to “RT3”, and after the type of BB-B2, the process proceeds to “RT4”. If configured.
(1-1) “RT3” and “RT4” have different AT addition lottery execution modes (the role of executing the additional lottery, the additional lottery winning probability, and the number of AT additional games).
(1-2) The BB start effect according to the type BB-B1 and the BB start effect according to the type BB-B2 have different effect tendencies (the selectivity of the BB start effect having a high degree of expectation is different).
(2) When the replay game 04 is stopped and displayed before the replay game 06 in the "AT preparation state" and the "RT3", the process shifts to "RT4", and the treasure box lost effect is not executed. In "RT4", the replaying player promoted to "RT3" wins. Further, when the game is changed from "RT4" to "RT3", the treasure chest opening addition effect is not executed even if the re-games-E1 to E3 are subsequently won.
(3) A plurality of types of BB roles are provided, and even if a BB role is won, it is difficult for a player to visually recognize which BB role has won, and after the BB ends depending on the type of BB And the execution state of the AT addition lottery at the time of winning the promotion re-game combination differs depending on the RT state. In such a configuration, the selection tendency of the treasure chest acquisition effect executed during the BB is made different depending on the type of the BB (the acquisition of the gold treasure chest, the acquisition of the silver treasure chest, the acquisition of the copper treasure chest, etc.). Number distribution is different).

<< Point 9 >>
(1) There is a setting difference that has been won during AT. There is no setting difference between the BB start effect for BB and the start effect for BB that has the same effect, and there is a setting difference that has been won during non-AT. There is a difference between the BB start effect of BB and the ratio of the same effect in the start effect of BB with no setting difference selected during non-AT.

<< Point 10 >>
(1) The setting value is suggested when the BB without the setting difference is won in the “normal section” rather than the probability that the effect indicating the setting value is selected when the BB with the setting difference is won in the “advantage section”. There is a higher probability that an effect will be selected.
(2) A different BB start effect is selected according to the setting difference for a BB that has been won during non-AT, but the same BB start effect is selected for a BB that has been won during AT regardless of the set difference.
(3) The ratio at which the BB start effect is the same effect mode between the BB with the setting difference won during AT and the BB without the setting difference won during AT, and the BB with the setting difference won during non-AT and the non-AT The ratio of the BB start effect in the same effect mode is different between the BB with no setting difference and the BB that has been won.

<< Point 11 >>
(1) At the time of the winning combination of “No difference in setting (winning rate that does not differ depending on the setting value) + BB” + BB, select “Advantage section indicator lighting + production B”, which can be executed when the winning of “No difference in setting” wins The probability of selecting “Advantage section indicator off + effect A”, which can be executed at the time of winning the “role with setting difference (the winning rate differs depending on the set value)”, is higher than the probability of performing The “role + BB time” is a production (for example, a battle production) that stimulates the BB winning, rather than a production that promotes the transition to the high probability state (for example, a transition to a stay stage where the user can stay in the high probability state). Is easier to implement.
(2) When a predetermined winning combination (for example, cherry) is won, the game is shifted to the high probability state at 100%, and the distribution of the number of highly secured failure games is changed from “50% → 3G, 40% → 20G, 10%”. → 50G ”, and if 3G is selected, the battle is lost, otherwise, the battle is won. Also, the degree of expectation of the length of the number of highly accurate games (whether it is 20 games or 50 games) differs depending on the opponent who has won the battle. Also, in the case of the above example, an effect that stimulates the continuity at the 20th high accuracy level (the effect that stimulates whether the game is a 20 game or a 50 game, and if it succeeds, the game is definitely determined to be 50 games) is executed. .

<< Point 12 >>
(1) There is a predetermined freeze effect that can be executed in the “normal section”, and the occurrence probability of the freeze effect differs depending on the set value.
(1-1) In the “advantageous section”, a predetermined freeze effect is not executed.
(1-2) The predetermined freeze effect is more easily performed in the “normal section” than in the “advantage section”.
(1-3) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-4) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed in the BB winning game with a setting difference.
(1-5) The predetermined freeze effect can be executed at the time of loss.

<<<< Configuration applicable to this example >>>>
A configuration applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Note that any of the configurations described below can be applied to all the above-described embodiments, and the configuration 1 described below may be applied, or a plurality of configurations described below may be applied. Supplement what you may do.

<< Configuration of Memory Map >>
First, with reference to FIG. 59, a configuration of a part of a memory map in a RAM (sometimes referred to as a first RAM) of a main control board M applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. In the area shown in the figure, from the upper address, (1) “set value data”: an area for data relating to a number for managing the setting stage, and (2) “external signal data”: external signal output Area for storing related information; (3) "RAM checksum data": data used in checksum calculation processing executed when power is turned on, calculated from data stored in RAM when power is turned off Area for storing information for calculating a specific value (for example, “0”) in a checksum calculation process executed when the power is turned on, and (4) “control command buffer”: Area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control board side. (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”: information used when power is turned off, and the current stack is used when power is turned off. An area for storing data stored in the pointer and storing information to be stored in the stack pointer when the power is restored, (6) “unused area”: an area for storing an area not used for a game, ( 7) “Saved data 1 to Saved data 8”: The areas are used in the order of the RAM in which the saved data is likely to be written to the maximum by design by the CALL instruction and the PUSH instruction. In such a configuration, the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design. However, when an unexpected failure (unexpected power interruption or the like) occurs, the highest address is higher than “7FF8H”. May be indicated by the stack pointer. In this case, there is a possibility that the save data may be stored beyond the area of “save data 1 to save data 8” secured as the area of the data to be saved in advance. In consideration of such a situation, an address (an address close to “7FF8H”) that may be indicated by the stack pointer in the case where the unexpected failure has occurred is data that does not affect the progress of the game (a small effect). Data) is preferably stored. Specifically, by providing an address for storing “set value data” at an address at least one address apart from “save data 1 to save data 8” previously secured as an area for data to be saved, It is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a disadvantage not only to the game player but also to the game arcade. In this figure, (5) “Stack Pointer Temporary Save Buffer” is data that is not used in the situation where the game is progressing after the power is restored, and (4) “Control Command Buffer” Means that even if the command cannot be transmitted to the sub-control board S, the progress of the game is hardly affected, and (3) "RAM checksum data" is used in a situation where the game is progressing after the power is turned off. (2) "External signal system data" is data to be transmitted to the hall computer, and therefore has little effect on the progress of the game. On the other hand, (1) “set value data” is data relating to set values that affect the outcome of the game, and for example, if the set value is changed to a low set value, a significant disadvantage occurs to the player. there is a possibility. Furthermore, for example, when the setting value is changed to a high setting value, there is a possibility that a significant disadvantage occurs in the game hall. As described above, (1) “set value data” is important data for normal progress of a game. For these reasons, in (1) to (7) in the figure, (1) “set value data” is the highest data (data stored in the higher address). In other words, addresses between (1) “set value data” and (7) “save data 1 to save data 8” include (2) “external signal data”, and (3) “RAM checksum data”. , (4) “control command buffer”, (5) “stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, and (6) “unused area”. With this configuration, even when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine and the number of data saved from the stack pointer to the RAM exceeds the design, the RAM is not used for the game. Thus, it is possible to configure the gaming machine so that an abnormal state is unlikely to occur. (2) “External signal data”, (3) “RAM checksum data”, (4) “Control command buffer”, (5) “Stack pointer temporary storage buffer”, (6) “Unused area” There is no problem even if the order of the addresses for storing the five data is changed. For example, the addresses may be stored in the order of (3) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6) from the upper address. Alternatively, they may be stored in the order of “(6) → (5) → (3) → (2) → (4)” from the upper address. In addition, (6) the “unused area” may not be provided. The data stored in the RAM areas (2) to (5) does not make it impossible to insert game medals even if the data stored in the RAM area is changed (game medals). No error that makes it impossible to input).

The area for storing the “set value data” shown in FIG. 59, in other words, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to store the following data.
(A) Total score data: an area for storing data related to the number of game values that plays the same role as the total number of game medals that can be inserted in an enclosed spinning-type gaming machine that does not use actual game medals (total When storing the score data in the area (1) in FIG. 59, the area (1) in FIG. 59 may be configured to have 2 bytes.
(B) Minimum game time: data for counting one minimum game time (subtracting a counter value for each interrupt processing) (one minimum game time is 4.1 seconds)
(C) BB operation acquired number counter: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending BB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
(D) Obtained number counter at the time of MB operation: a counter for determining whether or not a condition (payout number) for ending MB is satisfied (a counter corresponding to a value obtained by adding a game value to a player) Value is subtracted)
A plurality of (A) to (D) and "set value data" may be stored (stored at different addresses), or only one of them may be stored. Good. In the case of a configuration in which a plurality of data can be stored, all of the plurality of data are stored at an address higher than the areas (2) to (7) in FIG. 59 (an area for storing is provided). It is preferable to configure so that With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade. Furthermore, if the address is at least higher than the area of (6), the highest address indicated by the stack pointer is “7FF8H” by design, but an unexpected failure (unexpected power failure, etc.) has occurred. In such a case, there is a possibility that the stack pointer indicates an address higher than “7FF8H”, but it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage a player or a game arcade.

<< Action at the time of replay stop display >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the action in the won game of the re-game applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example will be described in detail. The configuration exemplified below exemplifies a configuration in which a game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game.

  First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains on), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Then, at the timing (5) in the figure, the automatic bet operation related to the replay that is stopped and displayed (when the replay is stopped and displayed, a bet is made without inserting a game medal or operating the bet button), the 2-bet lamp is displayed. D212 lights up. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and as an automatic bet operation related to the replay that has been stopped, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on, and the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. At about the same time, the start lamp D180 and the enabling lamp D300 are turned on (the enabling lamp D300 may be configured to blink).

  Here, the features of the operation in the figure will be described in detail below.

<Configuration 1>
The start lamp D180 and the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the replay is stopped are lit at substantially the same time. When the insertable lamp D300 is turned on after the start lamp D180, when the player wants to insert a game medal, the player recognizes that the game medal cannot be inserted by visually recognizing that the start lamp D180 is turned on first. On the other hand, if the start lamp D180 is turned on after the turn-on lamp D300, it may be recognized that the game cannot be started. Therefore, by turning on the insertable lamp D300 and the start lamp D180 substantially simultaneously as described above, it is possible to smoothly determine the player's insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever D50, and to determine the wrong game medal. The closing and the operation of the start lever D50 can be prevented.

<Configuration 2>
The 1-bet lamp D211 is always on from the betting operation timing for the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed until the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay winning, and it is possible to notify the player that the replay has been won as soon as possible. It can be smooth.

<Configuration 3>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the start lamp D180. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, the fact that the re-game has been won is notified first, and then the start lamp D180 is turned on and the start lever D50 can be operated by the re-game win. By notifying the player of the fact, the player can smoothly grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 4>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the insertable lamp D300. As described above, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, the fact that the re-game has been won is notified first, and then the turn-on lamp D300 is turned on to notify that the game medal can be inserted. This makes it easy to grasp the game situation.

<Configuration 5>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 3-bet lamp D213. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Configuration 6>
The lighting of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is at a timing before the lighting of the 2-bet lamp D212. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Configuration 7>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game for which the re-game is stopped are turned on. They do not light up at the same time). With this configuration, the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation has been performed by the replay winning, and the progress of the game can be made smooth.

<Configuration 8>
The turn-off timings of the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 after the replay is stopped and displayed are substantially the same. If a plurality of lamps (2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213) are turned on, it is difficult to grasp the game state. Therefore, by turning off 2-bet lamp D212 and 3-bet lamp D213 almost simultaneously, the player Be able to quickly grasp the game state.

<Configuration 9>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Structure 10>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game is earlier than the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D213 after the stop display of the re-game. In this way, by turning on the re-game lamp D290 first, it is notified in advance that the re-game has been won, so that the player can easily recognize that the automatic bet operation by the re-game win has been performed. Since the player can be notified that the re-game has been won, the progress of the game can be made smoother.

<Configuration 11>
The start lamp D180 and the 3-bet lamp D213 of the next game for which the replay has been stopped are lit almost simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the operation of the start lever D50 is effective, so that the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

<< Other actions 1 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration of FIG. 60 in the won game of the replay which is applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example will be described in detail below as the other operation 1.

<Configuration 12>
The two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 may always be lit from the betting operation timing of the game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed until the end of the game in the next game in which the re-game is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the automatic betting operation has been performed by the replay winning, and it is possible to notify the player that the replay has been won as soon as possible. Can be smoothed.

<Configuration 13>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. The player wants to be notified that the automatic betting operation is being performed. However, if the betting lamp (the two-betting lamp D212) is continuously turned on, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the gaming state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the 2-bet lamp D212 relating to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is displayed in which the re-gaming is stopped (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light before the light is turned on.

<Configuration 14>
The turn-on timing of the re-game lamp D290 based on the stop display of the re-game and the turn-off timing of the 3-bet lamp D 213 after the stop display of the re-game may be configured substantially simultaneously. We want to notify the player that the automatic betting operation is being performed, but if the betting lamp (three-betting lamp D213) continues to be turned on, it will be difficult to grasp the gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to smoothly grasp the game state, and furthermore, the lighting timing of the three-bet lamp D213 related to the next game in which the re-gaming lamp D290 is stopped and displayed (the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300 may be used). It is possible to notify in advance that it is not necessary to insert a game medal by turning on the light before the light is turned on.

<Structure 15>
If the player wins a re-game in a certain game and also wins the re-game in the next game of the certain game, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on based on the stop display of the re-game in the certain game. Thus, the re-game lamp D290 may continue to be turned on until the end of the game after the certain game. In this way, by continuously lighting the re-game lamp D290, the player can be quickly notified of the re-game winning, and the progress of the game can be smooth.

<Structure 16>
Various lamps such as a re-game lamp D290, a 3-bet lamp D213, a 2-bet lamp D212, a 1-bet lamp D211, a start lamp D180, and an insertable lamp D300 are triggered by the third stop operation (or a re-game symbol stop display). May be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification by the ramp according to the progress timing of the game, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the progress status of the game.

<Configuration 17>
The lighting timing of the re-game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the turn-on lamp D300 may be configured to be substantially simultaneous. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the lamp is turned on based on the stop display of the replay.

<Configuration 18>
Based on the stop display of the re-game, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off almost simultaneously, and thereafter, the 3-bet lamp D213, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 1-bet lamp D211 are turned off. You may comprise so that it may light substantially simultaneously. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the re-game is won is three.

<Configuration 19>
Based on the stop display of the replay, the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, and the one-bet lamp D211 are almost simultaneously turned off, and then the three-bet lamp D213, the two-bet lamp D212, the one-bet lamp D211 and the other bet lamps are turned off. The game lamp D290, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 may be configured to be turned on substantially simultaneously. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the number of game medals to be automatically bet when the player has won the re-game is three, and to clearly turn on the lamp based on the stop display of the re-game. Can be notified.

<< Other actions 2 >>
Here, an operation different from the configuration in FIG. 60 in the replayed game that can be applied to the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example, which is different from the configuration in FIG. Will be described.

<Functional diagram 2 when the replay stop is displayed>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, an operation applicable to the spinning-type gaming machine of this example will be described in detail.

  First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. At approximately the same time, the re-game lamp D290 is turned on, and the two-bet lamp D212 and the three-bet lamp D213 are turned off at substantially the same time. Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the closing lamp are turned on. The possible lamps D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 3 regarding re-game stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 4 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and thereafter, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the start lamp D180 and the start lamp D180 are almost simultaneously turned on at the same time as the re-game lamp D290 is turned on. The enabling lamp D300 is turned on. Thereafter, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective at the timing (4) in the figure. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Operational diagram 5 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211 and the 2-bet lamp D212 and the re-game lamp D290 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously.

<Functional Diagram 6 for Replay Stop Display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, almost simultaneously with the re-game lamp D290 being turned on, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional Diagram 7 at the Time of Replay Stop Display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing of (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing of (3) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the re-game lamp D290 and The start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on almost simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

<Functional diagram 8 when replay stop is displayed>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, at the timing (2) in the figure, the stop button is released (ON → OFF), and then, at the timing (3) in the figure, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, and the 3-bet lamp D213 are switched. Turns off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the re-game lamp D290, the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212, the 3-bet lamp D213, the start lamp D180, and the insertable lamp D300. And light up almost simultaneously.

<Functional Diagram 9 for Replay Stop Display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 are turned off almost simultaneously. Thereafter, at the timing (5) in the figure, the 2-bet lamp D212 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (6) in the figure, the 3-bet lamp D213 is turned on. Thereafter, at the timing (7) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes effective, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211 remains lit.

<Functional diagram 10 regarding replay stop display>
First, in the game that has been won in the replay (the previous game is lost), two reels are stopped, one reel (also referred to as the last reel) is rotating, and a 1-bet lamp D211, a 2-bet lamp D212, Under the situation where the 3-bet lamp D213 is lit, the stop button corresponding to the last reel is operated (the stop button remains ON), and the re-game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing (1) in the figure. . Thereafter, the stop button is released (ON → OFF) at the timing (2) in the figure, and then the re-game lamp D290 is turned on at the timing (3) in the figure. Thereafter, at the timing (4) in the figure, the operation of the start lever D50 becomes valid, and the start lamp D180 and the turn-on lamp D300 are turned on substantially simultaneously. Note that the 1-bet lamp D211, the 2-bet lamp D212 and the 3-bet lamp D213 remain lit.

  In addition, among the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 61 to 63, the same configuration as the above-described configuration 1 to configuration 19 can produce the same effect as the configuration 1 to configuration 19 described above.

  In addition, the stop display timing of the re-game symbol, the operation timing of the stop button, the light-on / off timing of the re-game lamp D290, the light-on / off timing of the three-bet lamp D213, the light-on / off timing of the two-bet lamp D212, It should be added that any configuration (timing) may be used in combination with respect to the lighting / extinguishing timing of the betting lamp D211, the lighting timing of the start lamp D180, and the lighting timing of the insertable lamp D300.

  In the above description, the configuration in which the game medal can be inserted even during the stop display of the re-game is exemplified, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the game medal cannot be inserted during the stop display of the re-game. It may be configured (applicable to all the configurations described above). In such a configuration, the insertable lamp D300 remains off while the replay is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned substantially simultaneous may be recognized as being simultaneously apparent when the player visually recognizes it. For example, any process (lighting / light-off timing) executed within a period of executing interrupt processing ten times may be used. If they are almost the same, there is no problem.

<< Configuration of Bet Button Lamp >>
The configuration related to the bet button lamp S50 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

  The process of turning the bet button D220 from invalid to valid is executed by the process of the main control board M, and thereafter, the main control board M transmits a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50 to the sub control board S side (main control board S). The board M may be configured to transmit a command to the side of the sub-control board S that the bet button D220 has become effective.) Then, the sub-control board S receives the bet button lamp S50 transmitted from the main control board M. May be configured to execute a process for turning on the bet button lamp S50 by receiving a command for turning on the bet button lamp S50. With this configuration, the bet button lamp S50 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but in a situation where the bet button D220 is valid according to the game situation on the main control board M side. The bet button lamp S50 can be reliably turned on, and even if the player visually recognizes the turn-on of the bet button lamp S50 and determines whether or not the bet (the bet button D220) is valid, the main control board M side It can be configured so as not to cause inconsistency with the game situation.

<< Configuration of stop button lamp >>
The configuration related to the stop button lamp S60 in the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.

  The processing of the stop button D40 (any one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) is performed by the processing of the main control board M from invalid to effective. A command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 (the stop button lamp S60 corresponding to the stop button on which the enabling process has been executed) is transmitted to the S side. The main control board M sends a stop button to the sub control board S side. D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43) may be configured to transmit a command indicating that it has become valid. Then, the sub control board S becomes the main control board. Executes the process for turning on the stop button lamp S60 by receiving the command for turning on the stop button lamp S60 transmitted from M. It may be so that configuration. With this configuration, the stop button lamp S60 manages lighting and extinguishing on the sub-control board S side, but the stop button lamp S60 is effective according to the game situation on the main control board M side. , The stop button lamp S60 can be surely turned on, and the player visually recognizes the lighting of the stop button lamp S60, and the stop button D40 (one of the left stop button D41, the middle stop button D42, and the right stop button D43). Can be configured so that even if it is determined whether or not is valid, there is no inconsistency with the game situation on the main control board M side.

<< Configuration of Reel Unit RU Applicable to This Example >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the spinning-type gaming machine according to the present example is provided with each of the reels M50 (M51, M52, and M53) rotatably via a reel unit RU. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. FIG. 65 is a sectional view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. The reel unit RU of the spinning-type gaming machine according to this example is an integrated unit that rotatably stores all three reels M51, M52, and M53. The reel unit RU has a substantially semi-cylindrical shape, and has an opening RU10. The three reels M51, M52 and M53 are provided on the reel unit RU so that the symbols of the three reels M51, M52 and M53 can be visually recognized through the opening RU10. Although the details will be described later, each of the three reels is formed by attaching a reel band MO to a reel frame MW.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the reel unit RU has a top part RU20 and a bottom part RU30 across the opening RU10. By mounting the bottom part RU30 of the reel unit RU on the upper surface of a pedestal part BU described later, the reel unit RU can be provided on the pedestal part BU.

<Through hole RU40>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, a plurality of, for example, three through holes RU40 are formed in the front end of the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. I have. The three through holes RU40 are formed to correspond to, for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53.

<< Pedestal part BU >>
The pedestal portion BU is made of a metal plate or the like, and has a substantially plate shape. An end of the base BU is attached to a left side, a right side, a back, or the like of the back box with a screw (not shown) or the like, and the base BU is fixed to the back box. The base BU is attached to the back box so as to extend in the horizontal direction. As described above, the reel unit RU is mounted on the base BU.

<Screw hole BU10>
At the front end of the base BU, a plurality of, for example, three screw holes BU10 are formed along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the front end. The plurality of through holes RU40 formed in the bottom RU30 of the reel unit RU described above are formed so as to correspond to each of the plurality of screw holes BU10 of the pedestal BU. The three screw holes BU10 are formed to correspond to, for example, a left reel M51, a middle reel M52, and a right reel M53.

  The numbers and positions of the through-holes RU40 and the screw holes BU10 may correspond to each other and may be arranged along the horizontal direction, as long as the reel unit RU can be stably mounted on the base BU. Further, only the reel unit RU may be attached to the pedestal portion BU by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU, or the reel unit may be configured by the screw hole BU10 (and the screw BS) of the pedestal portion BU. Both the RU and one reel (the left reel M51, the center reel M52, or the right reel M53) may be configured to be attached to the base BU.

<< How to fix the reel unit RU >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the reel unit RU is mounted on the pedestal BU, and the reel is mounted such that each of the through holes RU40 of the reel unit RU communicates with the corresponding screw hole BU10 of the pedestal BU. By positioning the unit RU and screwing the screw BS into the screw hole BU10 through the through hole RU40 of the reel unit RU, the reel unit RU can be attached and held at a fixed position of the pedestal portion BU. By doing so, the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the base BU.

  The reel unit RU may be detachably attached using a detachable rivet, for example, a push rivet or the like, instead of being attached with a screw member or a screw member other than the screw BS. It is sufficient that the reel unit RU can be detachably attached to the pedestal portion BU by an engaging member, a locking member, or the like.

<< Hopper H40 and medal auxiliary tank HS >>
FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the back right side, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the hopper H40 from the back left side. 66 (a) and 66 (b) also show arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS described later. The arrows indicating the movement of the screw BS are shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B for both the positions (1) and (2) of the screw BS and the hopper H40.

  The hopper H40 is a funnel-shaped tank molded of ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin or the like. As shown in FIG. 66, the hopper H40 has a front side wall H42, a left side wall H44, a rear side wall H46, and a right side wall H48. The front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48 are arranged so as to go around, and an opening H30 is formed by the front side wall H42, the left side wall H44, the rear side wall H46, and the right side wall H48. You. The opening H30 is formed so as to open upward. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot D170 described above is introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30.

  Further, the hopper H40 has a hopper bottom portion H52, a right inclined portion H54, and a left inclined portion H56. The right inclined portion H54 is disposed on the right side of the hopper H40, and a game medal introduced to the right side of the hopper H40 is guided by its own weight toward a hopper bottom H52 described later. The left inclined portion H56 is disposed on the left side of the hopper H40, and guides medals introduced on the left side of the hopper H40 toward the hopper bottom H52 by its own weight. Further, the left inclined portion H56 has a covering portion H57. The covering portion H57 extends from the left inclined portion H56 and is disposed so as to cover an upper portion of a substantially left half of a disk H50 described later. By providing the covering portion H57, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game medals from being continuously linked to the hopper bottom H52 so that the game medals cannot be dropped, and the game medals can be smoothly guided toward the hopper bottom H52.

  By providing the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57, any of the game medals introduced into the hopper H40 through the opening H30 can be guided to the hopper bottom H52. The medals guided by the right inclined section H54, the left inclined section H56, and the covering section H57 are stored in the hopper bottom H52. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion that stores game medals inside the hopper H40.

  A disk H50 as a rotating body is disposed on the hopper bottom H52. The disc H50 is driven to rotate by the hopper motor H80 described above, and game medals are discharged from the game medal exit H60 by the rotation of the disc H50. In this manner, the medals stored in the hopper H40 can be discharged one by one from the game medal exit H60.

<Discharge guide H62>
A discharge guide portion H62 is formed inside the front side wall H42 along the front side wall H42. The discharge guide portion H62 has a long shape, and has an inclined surface H64 formed to be inclined. When the hopper H40 is arranged in the back box, the right side of the inclined surface H64 is located lower than the left side of the inclined surface H64. The width of the inclined surface H64 is formed substantially constant, but is formed so as to be slightly widened downward (from left to right).

  The discharge guide portion H62 guides the game medals on the upper portion of the hopper H40 to the medal auxiliary tank HS before the game medals overflow from the hopper H40, and stores the game medals in the hopper H40. This is a member for reducing the number of medals being played. A discharge port H66 is formed on the right side of the inclined surface H64, and the game medals guided by the inclined surface H64 are discharged to the medal auxiliary tank HS via the discharge port H66. As described above, the discharge guide portion H62 functions as a discharge inclined portion that discharges game medals to the outside of the hopper H40. As described above, the right inclined portion H54, the left inclined portion H56, and the covering portion H57 function as a storage inclined portion for storing game medals inside the hopper H40, whereas the discharge guide portion H62 displays the game medals. It functions as a discharge inclined part for discharging to the outside of the hopper H40, and has a function opposite to the right inclined part H54 and the left inclined part H56.

  The left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 all move the game medal from the left to the right. That is, each of the left inclined portion H56, the covering portion H57, and the discharge guide portion H62 has a rightward downward inclination. The final target of the left inclined portion H56 and the covering portion H57 is the hopper bottom portion H52, and the final target of the discharge guide portion H62 is the medal auxiliary tank HS. The movement of the game medals can be aligned from left to right.

  In the vicinity of the discharge port H66 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62, a protruding wall H58 protruding upward is provided along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64. The projecting wall H58 can prevent the medal placed on the inclined surface H64 from dropping to the hopper bottom H52.

<Medal auxiliary tank HS>
The medal auxiliary tank HS has a substantially quadrangular prism shape, and has a bottom surface and four side surfaces. The medal auxiliary tank HS has an opening HS10 at an upper portion, and medals discharged from the hopper H40 are introduced through the opening HS10 and stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The detailed structure and function of the medal auxiliary tank HS will be described later.

<< Removal of screw BS of reel unit RU >>
In a spinning-type gaming machine, a front door DU is attached to a back box so as to be openable and closable (the front door DU and the back box may be collectively referred to as a housing). The front door DU is rotatably attached to the back box around the left side of the front door DU (left side as viewed from the player) as a center of rotation. For this reason, the right side of the front door DU (the right side as viewed from the player) has the longest moving distance, and when the front door DU is closed, an impact due to contact with or collision with the back box occurs and propagates to the back box. Since an impact is generated on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine, the impact on the right side of the spinning-type gaming machine is the largest, and the impact tends to gradually decrease on the left side of the rotating-type gaming machine.

  As described above, the reel unit RU is detachably attached to the base BU by the screw BS. The screw BS is screwed into the screw hole BU10 of the pedestal portion BU at three places on the left side, the center, and the right side, and the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 receives the largest impact. For this reason, the right screw BS screwed into the right screw hole BU10 is most easily loosened by an impact, and when the screwing is released, the right screw BS drops and falls. The central screw BS screwed into the central screw hole BU10 is also subjected to an impact, and may loosen and fall off due to the impact. The left screw BS screwed into the left screw hole BU10 is assumed to have a small impact to some extent. However, there is a possibility that the left screw BS will loosen and fall off depending on the degree of propagation of the impact and the usage time.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (1) >>
As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the hopper H40 (medal payout device H) and the medal auxiliary tank HS are arranged below the reel unit RU. In the example shown in FIG. 64, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located at least below the right screw BS among the three screws BS described above.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 1A). The dropped right screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64, and moves along the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the right screw BS (arrow 1B). When the right screw BS reaches the discharge port H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 1C) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, even when the right screw BS is dropped due to the impact, it can be discharged from the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from entering the hopper H40 beforehand. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the disk H50 from being hindered or to damage the disk H50, and to operate the hopper H40 stably.

  In the above-described example, only the right screw BS is targeted, but the hopper H40 is configured such that all three left screws BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS are located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. And the reel unit RU may be positioned. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS. Further, in this example, the screw BS for mounting the reel unit RU on the pedestal portion BU has been described as an example. A member such as a screw attached to the right side (right side as viewed from the player) may be configured to be stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS when dropped.

<< Position of screw BS and hopper H40 (2) >>
FIG. 67 is a front view showing the arrangement of the reel unit RU and the hopper H40. In the example shown in FIG. 67, of the three screws BS described above, the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40 is located below the central screw BS, and the medal auxiliary tank HS is located below the right screw BS. In FIG. 67, the same components as those in FIG. 64 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  When the right screw BS falls off due to an impact, it freely falls downward (arrow 2A), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS as it is (without touching the inclined surface H64).

  When the central screw BS falls off due to an impact, it first falls freely downward (arrow 3A). The dropped central screw BS reaches the inclined surface H64, and rolls on the inclined surface H64 while being guided by the inclined surface H64 by the weight of the central screw BS, and moves along the inclined surface H64 (arrow 3B). When the central screw BS reaches the outlet H66, it falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS (arrow 3C), and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  The dropped right-hand screw BS and the central screw BS are prevented from entering the hopper H40, and the dropped screw BS is prevented from hindering the rotation operation of the disk H50 or damaging the disk H50. It can be operated stably.

  In the above-described example, the right screw BS and the center screw BS are targeted. However, the hopper H40 and the reel unit RU are positioned so that the left screw BS is also located above the inclined surface H64 of the hopper H40. Is also good. Whichever screw BS is dropped, the dropped screw BS can be guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As described above, it is preferable to form the protruding wall H58 that protrudes upward along the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface H64 on the depth side of the inclined surface H64 of the discharge guide portion H62. By providing the protruding wall H58, it is possible to prevent the screw BS falling off and resting on the inclined surface H64 from falling to the hopper bottom H52. The height of the protruding wall H58 is equal to or greater than the height at which the screw BS rebounds when the screw BS falls on the inclined surface H64. The screw BS can be prevented from dropping to the hopper bottom H52, and the screw BS can be prevented from hindering or causing the disk H50 to malfunction.

  As described above, even when the screw BS for attaching the reel unit RU is detached due to vibration or the like due to opening and closing of the front door DU, the detached screw BS does not enter the hopper H40, and the medal assisting device is not used. By configuring to fall into the tank HS, the manager of the game arcade can easily collect the detached screw BS.

<< Hopper H400 >>
In the example shown in FIG. 67, when the right screw BS drops, it passes through the outside of the hopper H40 (the right side of the right side wall H48 when viewed from the player) (arrow 2A) and is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The configuration is such that the dropped right screw BS is stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS without passing through the inside of the hopper H40, so that it can be shared with the hopper H40 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 67, a hopper H400 having a structure in which the right side wall H48 extends rightward (right side wall H480) may be used. In the hopper H400, a bottom opening H410 is formed at the bottom near the right side wall H480. When the right screw BS falls, it passes through the inside of the hopper H400, and further passes through the bottom opening H410 to form a medal auxiliary tank. Stored in HS. In this manner, through the bottom opening H410, the dropped right screw BS can be accurately guided to the medal auxiliary tank HS without entering the hopper H40.

<< Extension part RU50 >>
In the above-described example, when the screw BS falls off, the screw BS falls freely toward the medal auxiliary tank HS below. On the other hand, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 65, an extension part EN may be provided below the reel unit RU or the pedestal part BU. By providing the extension portion EN, even if the screw BS drops, the screw BS does not immediately fall, but can be once guided by the extension portion EN and then dropped into the medal auxiliary tank HS. In this manner, the extension portion EN can match the position where the screw BS is attached with the position of the medal auxiliary tank HS, and can increase the degree of freedom of the position where the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged.

<< Configuration of medal auxiliary tank HS >>
<Through hole HS20 for full detection electrode>
As shown in FIG. 68, in the medal auxiliary tank HS, at least two full-hole detection electrode through-holes HS20 are formed on the rear surface. Further, two full detection electrodes DE and a continuity detection board CC (see FIG. 65) are provided in a lower portion of the back surface of the back box. The two full detection electrodes DE have a long shape, extend in parallel with each other and horizontally, and are arranged so as to protrude forward. The two full-hole detection electrode through holes HS20 of the medal auxiliary tank HS are formed corresponding to the two full detection electrodes DE. When the medal auxiliary tank HS is arranged at the bottom of the back box, the two full detection electrodes DB pass through the corresponding full detection electrode through holes HS20 and protrude toward the inside of the medal auxiliary tank HS.

  As medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS, the uppermost portion UL of the stored game medals (see FIG. 69 (c)) gradually rises and approaches the two full detection electrodes DE. FIG. 69 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which game medals are stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. The line of the uppermost part UL shown in FIG. 69 (c) is a line (for example, an envelope or the like) connecting the outlines of the game medals located in the uppermost part UL among the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS. (For convenience, the uppermost portion UL is shown by a smooth curve). When the game medals stored in the medal auxiliary tank HS come in contact with the two full detection electrodes DE and the two full detection electrodes DE conduct through a plurality of medals, the two full detection electrodes DE are connected to each other. An electric circuit is formed. Due to the formation of the electric circuit, the conduction detection substrate CC outputs a signal indicating that conduction has occurred between the two full detection electrodes DE. In this way, when game medals are stored up to the position of the two full detection electrodes DE, a medal full error can be detected.

  The number of full detection electrodes DE is not limited to two, but may be three or more. For example, when three electrodes are provided, one full detection electrode is newly provided below the two full detection electrodes in addition to the two full detection electrodes described above, and the newly provided one electrode is provided. A medal full error can be detected by conducting between the fullness detecting electrode and one of the two fullness detecting electrodes described above, so that the medal assistance can be detected. Even when game medals are not evenly stored in the tank HS (for example, when game medals are stored on the right side of the medal auxiliary tank HS), a medal full error can be detected.

<<<< material of screw BS and material of medal >>
The material of the screw BS is magnetizable and conductive. For example, it is formed of a steel material. The material of the medal is non-magnetically attachable and conductive. For example, it is formed by plating brass or stainless steel. With this configuration, even when the screw BS falls into the medal auxiliary tank HS, the screw BS can be easily taken out of the medal auxiliary tank HS by using a magnet or the like.

<< Relationship between total length BL of screw BS and distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE >>
The left screw BS, the center screw BS, and the right screw BS described above are used for attaching the reel unit RU to the base BU. FIG. 69 (b) is a front view showing the whole screw BS. The screw BS used has a total length BL in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 69 (b)) shorter than a distance EL (see FIG. 69 (a)) between the two full detection electrodes DE (see FIG. 69 (a)). Total length BL <distance EL between two full detection electrodes DE). By doing so, even if the screw BS (for example, the right screw BS) falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, it is shorter than the space between the full detection electrodes DE. Does not conduct with the full detection electrode DE (the screw BS does not catch on the two full detection electrodes DE). The total length BL of the screw BS is the sum of the thickness (length) of the head and the nominal length. FIG. 69 (a) is a plan view of the inner part of the medal auxiliary tank HS showing a state in which the full detection electrode DE protrudes into the medal auxiliary tank HS.

<<< Relationship between length HR of seat surface of screw BS and diameter ED of full detection electrode DE >>>
The radial length HR (see FIG. 69 (b)) of the seat surface of the screw BS is shorter than the diameter ED (see FIG. 69 (a)) of the fullness detection electrode DE (see FIG. 69 (a)). Length HR <diameter ED of full detection electrode DE). In this way, even when the screw BS falls off and enters the medal auxiliary tank HS, the head of the screw BS is not hooked on the one full detection electrode DE, and Even when the BS comes in contact with the full detection electrode DE, it can be immediately separated, and the screw BS alone does not accidentally conduct.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), one of the two full detection electrodes DE is full (eg, the full detection electrode DE on the right side in FIG. 69 (c)). When in contact with the medal (uppermost portion UL), the other full detection electrode DE (for example, the left full detection electrode DE in FIG. 69 (c)) and the screw BS temporarily contact. Even if such a case occurs, the screw BS is not hooked on the full detection electrode DE, and the screw BS can be immediately separated from the full detection electrode DE (see the arrow F in FIG. 69 (c)). , No conductive circuit is formed via the screw BS, and the full state of the medal auxiliary tank HS is not erroneously determined.

  In this example, the case where the reel unit RU is an integrated unit that accommodates all three reels has been described. However, even if the reel unit RU is a separate unit that accommodates each of the three reels separately, the screw BS may be used. It is detachably attached to the pedestal part BU, and the possibility that the screw BS comes off similarly arises. Therefore, a configuration such as the medal auxiliary tank HS or the screw BS can be similarly employed.

<< Reel band configuration >>
FIG. 70A is a front view showing the entire reel band MO. FIG. 70B is a perspective view showing a state where the reel band MO is curved. FIG. 70 (c) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of a break M59 of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. FIG. 70D is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the “white seven” symbol in an enlarged manner. The “white seven” symbol is a bonus symbol, and BB is started when “white seven / white seven / white seven” is stopped and displayed on the activated line. The reel band MO has a long, thin plate-like shape (band shape). As described above, a plurality of symbols are drawn on the reel band MO along the longitudinal direction. The reel band MO has flexibility and can be curved. In addition, it has translucency, and it is possible to illuminate the design from the back with light emitted from the torso backlight.

  The reel strip MO has a first end M55 and a second end M57 in the longitudinal direction. The first end portion M55 and the second end portion M57 are curved so as to face each other, and are attached to the reel frame MW to form an annular (cylindrical) reel M50. The reel frame MW is mainly composed of two annular frames of the same size, and the two frames are formed of a resin such as plastic to reduce the weight. The two frames are arranged in parallel with each other and with their centers located on the same rotation axis. The interval between the two frames is arranged to be substantially the same as the width of the reel band MO. By attaching the reel band MO between the two frames along the outer periphery of the two frames, the reel M50 can be formed.

<Overlapping portion M58 and break M59>
The length of the reel band MO in the longitudinal direction is slightly longer than the length of the entire circumference of the reel frame MW. Therefore, when the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW, a portion where the reel band MO partially overlaps near the first end M55 and the second end M57 (overlapping portion M58) occurs. In this way, the reel band MO can be mounted over the entire periphery of the reel frame MW without a gap being formed in the circumferential direction (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO). Further, when the reel band MO is mounted on the reel frame MW, a part of the reel band MO overlaps, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (c), the reel band MO is stuck on the upper side of the second end M57, and a cut M59 is formed by the first end M55. When the reel band MO is attached to the reel frame MW as described above, first, when the reel band MO starts to be attached, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the reel frame MW is attached to the reel frame MW. While gradually rotating in the same direction as the rotation direction of M50, the reel band MO is stuck from the second end M57 toward the first end M55 along one circumference of the reel frame MW. The reel band MO is stuck on the upper side of the second end M57, and is stuck to the first end M55. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the first end M55 ends in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the first end M55 is put on the reel band MO. The portion M55 is in an overlapping state.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then, while gradually rotating the reel frame MW in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50, the reel band MO is moved to the first end M55. Along the circumference of the reel frame MW from M55 to the second end M57, finally, a reel band MO is applied above the first end M55, and is applied up to the second end M57. Ends. When the reel band MO is pasted in such an order, the second end M57 ends in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50, and the second end M57 is placed on the reel band MO. M57 overlaps.

  Here, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the first end M55, and then the second end M57 is attached in the same direction as the rotation direction of the reel M50. When the end M57 of the second end overlaps, when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates, the air comes into contact with the cross section of the second end M57 (the air resistance is large). Then, air easily enters between the second end M57 and the reel band MO below the second end M57, and the reel band MO near the second end M57 is gradually peeled off.

  On the other hand, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end M57, and then the first end M55 is attached in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel M50. In the case where the first end portion M55 overlaps the upper end, the state where the second end portion M57 overlaps the above-described reel band MO when the game is executed and the reel M50 rotates. As compared with, air does not easily come into contact with the cross section of the first end M55 (the air resistance is small), and air does not easily enter between the first end M55 and the reel band MO below the first end M55. The reel band MO near the first end M55 is hardly peeled off.

  As described above, when attaching the reel band MO to the reel frame MW, the reel band MO starts to be attached to the reel frame MW from the second end portion M57, and then the first end portion M55 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the reel M50. It is preferable that the first end portion M55 overlaps the reel band MO so that the first end portion M55 overlaps the reel band MO.

<Various errors>
As described above, when the reel band MO is mounted on the reel frame MW, an overlap portion M58 is formed between the first end M55 and the second end M57, and the first end M55 or the second end M55 is formed. A cut M59 is formed by any one of the ends M57. Since the above-described reel frame MW is formed of a resin such as plastic, an error may occur during molding. Further, when assembling the reel frame MW, an error may occur due to deformation. Furthermore, since the reel band MO has flexibility, when the reel band MO is mounted on the reel frame MW, the reel band MO is mounted with distortion or the like occurring, or the size of the reel frame MW ( (Outer periphery) may be attached in a state slightly different from the design value. When a large symbol (for example, “White Seven”) is positioned on the reel band MO below the superimposed portion M58, the mounting position of the reel band MO is desired due to these various errors. In the case where the large symbol overlaps with the large symbol, the large symbol may be covered by the upper reel band MO when the large symbol overlaps with the large symbol.

  In addition, the player may aim at the bonus symbol depending on the game state, and when the bonus symbol is arranged near the cut M59, the player may aim at the bonus symbol at the time of pushing. For example, when the bonus symbol is stopped, the cut M59 may be visually recognized when the bonus symbol is visually recognized. When the above-described various errors have occurred, it is assumed that the player may visually recognize not only the design but also the shift of the cut M59 and the shift of the position of the design. When the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol combination, the player pays attention to the bonus symbol together with the joy, since the symbol combination is a symbol combination having a high profit for the player. If the shift of the position is visually recognized, the joy that the symbol combination serving as the bonus symbol is stopped and displayed may decrease.

<In case of bonus design>
In order to prevent such a situation, a symbol smaller than the largest symbol such as a bonus symbol is arranged at a position closest to the cut M59. Specifically, when the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (such as the bonus symbol) having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LL, the length in the longitudinal direction is larger than LL. The shorter symbol (the length SL in the longitudinal direction) is arranged at a position closest to both the first end M55 and the second end M57.

  By arranging the symbols having the short length in the longitudinal direction at the positions closest to the first end M55 and the second end M57 in this manner, even if various errors occur, even if these errors occur. The symbol can be arranged at a position separated from the overlapping portion M58 (cut M59), and the symbol can be prevented from being covered by the reel band MO. Further, even when the above-described various errors occur, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the shift of the cut M59, the shift of the symbol position, and the like. In the drawing, the length in the longitudinal direction of a bell symbol (a symbol that can form a symbol combination corresponding to a bell) and the longitudinal length of a cherry symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to a cherry) are shown. Although shown as the same SL, if the length is shorter than LL which is the length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the length direction, the length of the bell symbol and the length of the cherry symbol in the length direction are made different. No problem. Further, the symbols arranged near the cut M59 are not limited to the bell symbol and the cherry symbol, but may be a bonus symbol. For example, a re-game symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game) Or a watermelon symbol (a symbol that can constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon) may be arranged near the cut M59. In the present example, the length in the longitudinal direction of the bonus symbol (white seven) is compared with the length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The length of the bonus symbol (white seven) in the width direction may be longer than the length of the symbol (for example, a bell symbol) located near the cut M59 in the width direction.

  In the above-described example, the length of the symbol having the longest length in the longitudinal direction of the symbol (eg, the bonus symbol) is LL, and the length of the symbol in the longitudinal direction is shorter than LL. The layout of the symbols is determined by the comparison of the above, but the length in the short direction (the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the reel band MO) is LT, and the short length of the symbol whose length in the short direction is shorter than LT. The arrangement of the symbols may be determined by comparison with the length ST in the direction.

  The above-mentioned lengths LL and SL in the longitudinal direction are the lengths of the differences between the uppermost protruding symbol portion and the lowermost protruding symbol portion along the longitudinal direction. Similarly, the lengths LT and ST in the short direction are the lengths of the difference between the symbol portion most protruding upward and the symbol portion most protruding downward along the short direction.

<In the case of small role design>
Furthermore, in addition to the bonus symbol, a symbol such as a watermelon symbol or a cherry symbol, which is not displayed on the activated line depending on the operation timing of the stop button even if it is won, in other words, is arranged at a distance more than the maximum number of slip frames. A symbol having at least one location (a symbol corresponding to a rare role, a symbol that may be overlooked, etc.) is also a symbol to be pushed, and is a symbol that the player attempts to visually recognize. It is. In addition, in a game that has won the rare role, the player may not be notified of the rare role before operating the stop button.In such a case, the player wants to win the rare role. In many cases, the stop button is operated at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button in which it is easy to acquire a role (which is most profitable for the player). Note that some gaming machines have a large number of winning combinations, such as one when the player wins a prize, and in such a case, the operation timing of the stop button (the operation timing of the stop button, which is the most profitable for the player). In many cases, the stop button is operated. Note that operating the stop button at the operation timing (operation mode) of the stop button that is most profitable for the player may be referred to as an optimal game method.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 71, an example of the relationship with the break M59 when the game is executed by the optimal game method will be described in detail below. In the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 71, the activated lines are: upper left reel, upper middle reel, upper right reel (upper straight line), middle left reel, middle reel middle line, right reel middle line (middle straight line), Left reel lower, middle reel lower, right reel lower (straight lower straight), left reel upper, middle reel middle, right reel lower (straight down straight), left reel lower, middle reel middle, right reel upper (right rising straight) ), And the specified number is three. In addition, when the role of watermelon and the role of cherry are held as rare roles, when the role of watermelon wins, "watermelon / watermelon / watermelon" is stopped and displayed in a straight line on the activated line, and the role of cherry wins Is configured to stop and display "Cherry / any / any" (any indicates any symbol) on a payline in a straight line. In addition, since both the watermelon symbol and the cherry symbol have a rare role, the symbol has at least one or more locations separated by more than the maximum number of sliding frames.

  FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the reel band MO in an enlarged manner. In the figure, only the left reel is illustrated. In the example shown in FIG. 71, watermelon, bell, replay, BAR, and cherry are arranged in this order on the reel band MO, and these symbols are located at positions away from the first end M55 and the second end M57. Are located in When the rare role is won, the player often operates the stop button aiming at a position on the reel where it is easy to detect the winning of the rare role and to easily win the rare role. When a certain watermelon role or cherry role is won, the rare role can be awarded by playing with the above-described optimal game method. Specifically, as the operation timing of the stop button that can win the rare role, the stop button is stopped during three frames from the timing at which the cherry symbol is positioned at the upper stage to the timing at which the cherry symbol is positioned at the lower stage. By operating the button, it is possible to win a prize regardless of whether the player wins the watermelon role or the cherry role. When the stop button is operated at such an operation timing (optimal game method), a range of nine frames from the upper stage of the cherry symbol to the lower stage of the watermelon symbol is a range in which stop display is possible, and is shown in FIG. As described above, even when any of the nine frames is stopped and displayed (in any of the nine stop display modes), the position distant from the first end M55 or the second end M57. (There is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames above the watermelon, and there is no cut M59 near the design placed two frames below the cherry), and the gap M59 is misaligned. It is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing a shift in the position of the symbols or symbols.

  As shown in the drawing, a symbol which can be stopped and displayed when the stop button is operated aiming at a position on the reel where the rare role can be easily won is displayed near the first end M55 or the second end M57. The first end M55 and the second end M57 can be configured not to be located at positions where the reel is frequently stopped and displayed on the reel. Even when a shift occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the shift of the cut M59 and the shift of the position of the symbol.

  In this example, the number of steps for one rotation of the reel is 336 steps, and the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 20 symbols (20 frames). Here, since 336/20 = 16, there are 16 remainders, so, as the distribution of 20 frames (symbols), 16 frames (symbols) of 17 steps and 4 frames (symbols) of 16 steps constitute one. The reel is configured. In addition, it is preferable that the cut M59 be configured so as not to be visually recognized by the player as much as possible. Therefore, the frame (symbol) adjacent to the cut M59 should be 16 steps having a relatively small number of steps. Is preferred.

  In addition, as the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine in this example, there is no need to insert and pay out substantial game medals used in a general spinning-type gaming machine, and a pseudo game medium that has been digitized is used. It may be configured to allow the game to proceed. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the effect of preventing unauthorized access to the inside of the spinning-type gaming machine can be improved by the amount that there is no need to insert and pay out substantial game medals (for example, the game medal insertion opening portion). And the front door and the back box are integrated so as to block the gap where foreign objects are inserted), to reduce the risk of using illegal gaming medals, It can also be configured to improve security against such illegal acts (so-called goto acts) (sometimes referred to as enclosed-type spinning-type gaming machines). Note that the configuration of the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine is applicable to any of the above-described embodiments (or configurations). The credit and the number-of-credits display device D200 may not be provided. For example, the credit and the total score (total score) may be combined into one total score, and the main control board M, the payout control The board H (may also be referred to as a game value control board or a game value control means) or another board may execute the process of increasing or decreasing the total score or the display process.

In addition, it corresponds to a substantial game medal used in a general spinning-type gaming machine, and has a "score" as a pseudo game medium used for playing a game in an enclosed spinning-type gaming machine. You may comprise. The “score” may be referred to as “score information”, “points”, “points information”, “game value”, and “game value information”. A physical game medal that physically exists can be handled and handled directly by the player. On the other hand, in the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine, the player can proceed with the game without directly handling substantial game medals. The score is not a substantial game medal but a pseudo game medium converted into data so that a CPU such as a main control board can perform arithmetic processing. The “credit” is a score for temporarily storing the score in a bettable state or a state in which the account can be settled, and is data mainly managed by the main control board M. Further, the “total score” is all the scores that can be put into the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine, and may be data managed by the main control board or the payout control board. The “total score” corresponds to the number of game medals placed on the medal tray of a general spinning-type gaming machine using substantial game medals. In the case where the configuration of the enclosed spinning-type gaming machine is applied to the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as a “game medal” in the present specification is referred to as a “score”, “score information”, “ There is no problem to treat them as "points", "point information", "game value", "game value information", etc. As appropriate, "score", "score information", "points", "point information" , "Game value" and "game value information". It is not necessary to have “credit”. Further, there is no problem in replacing the credit number display device with the total score display device.

  As described above, the configuration of the spinning-type gaming machine has been exemplified as the gaming machine, but the above-described configuration is applied to various gaming models such as pachinko gaming machines, rock-ball gaming machines, arrangement balls, game machines, casino machines, and the like. it can.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiment. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above-described embodiments are added to these concepts as well as combining and separating (listing the higher-level concepts) of these listed concepts. You may.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A belt-shaped reel tape (for example, a reel band MO) wound around an outer periphery of a reel base (for example, a reel frame MW);
On the reel tape, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged along a longitudinal direction of the reel tape,
The type of the symbol has at least a first symbol (for example, a white seven symbol) and a second symbol (for example, a bell symbol),
The maximum width value of the first symbol is configured to be larger than the maximum width value of the second symbol,
The second symbol is arranged on at least one of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape, and the first symbol is not arranged on each of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. ,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a length in a longitudinal direction of the reel tape is longer than an outer circumference of a surface of the reel base on which the reel tape is wound.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine body so as to be openable and closable;
In a revolving-type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., a hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
A slope portion (for example, an inclined surface H64) that descends from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a part of the main tank member,
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS),
A gaming machine, wherein the slope portion is located vertically below the locking component which is closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (3) includes:
Gaming machine body,
A front door (for example, a front door DU) attached to the gaming machine body so as to be openable and closable;
In a revolving-type gaming machine having a reel unit (for example, a reel unit RU) inside a gaming machine body,
Inside the gaming machine body,
A pedestal portion on which the reel unit is installed (for example, a pedestal portion BU);
A main tank member (e.g., a hopper H40) that is installed below the pedestal portion and stores game media;
An auxiliary tank member (e.g., a medal auxiliary tank HS) installed near the main tank member for retracting surplus game media stored in the main tank member;
The reel unit and the pedestal are detachably held by a locking component (for example, a screw BS),
A gaming machine, wherein the auxiliary tank member is located vertically below the locking component which is closest to the side on which the front door opens and closes.

The gaming machine according to this aspect (4) includes:
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button D40);
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (eg, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen).
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) is operated after one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, it is configured to be able to display the specific image in the effect display unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second predetermined time is longer than the first predetermined time.

The gaming machine according to the present mode (5),
A plurality of reels (for example, reel M50);
A plurality of stop switches (for example, a stop button D40);
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (eg, an effect display device S40);
An operation member (for example, a sub input button SB, a cross key SB2) capable of changing display contents of the effect,
After rotating the plurality of reels by satisfying a predetermined game start condition, the rotation of the reels is stopped according to the operation of the stop switch, and the rotation is finally stopped among the plurality of reels. One game can be ended by performing a final stop switch operation that is an operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel and stopping all of the plurality of reels,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a first predetermined time elapses without a bet from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, a specific image (for example, , Standby screen).
When a predetermined operation member (for example, sub input button SB) is operated after one game, a predetermined image (for example, a menu screen) can be displayed on the effect display unit,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, a second predetermined time elapses while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. Then, it is configured to be able to display the specific image in the effect display unit,
The second predetermined time is configured to be longer than the first predetermined time,
When the predetermined operation member is operated and the predetermined image is displayed, the second predetermined time is displayed while the predetermined image is displayed from a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. If a specific operation member (for example, the cross key SB2) is operated before the elapse of the predetermined time, the predetermined image is displayed and displayed at a specific timing after the predetermined operation member is operated. 2 Even if the predetermined time has elapsed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit,
When the final stop switch operation is performed, before the first predetermined time elapses without betting from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the stop switch is newly added. Even if the above operation is performed, if the first predetermined time elapses without a bet being made from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed, the specific image can be displayed on the effect display unit. It is composed of
When the final stop switch operation is performed, if a bet is made before the first predetermined time elapses without a bet being performed from a predetermined timing after the final stop switch operation is performed. Wherein, even if the first predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined timing after the last stop switch operation was performed, the specific image is not displayed on the effect display unit. Machine.

P-turn machine, DU front door (door)
D door board, D10s input receiving sensor D20s first input sensor, D30s second input sensor D40 stop button, D41 left stop button D42 middle stop button, D43 right stop button D50 start lever, D60 settlement button D70 display panel, D80 door switch D90 coin shooter, D100 blocker D130 upper panel, D140 lower panel D150 decorative lamp unit, D160 reel window D170 medal slot, D180 start lamp D290 replay game lamp, D300 insertable lamp D200 credit number display device, D210 insertion number display light D220 Bet button, D230 Medal tray D240 outlet, D250 Special game status display D260 Keyhole, D270 Number of payouts display (push order display)
D280 AT counter value display device M main control board M20 setting key switch, M30 setting / reset button C main control chip, M50 reel M51 left reel, M52 middle reel M53 right reel, M60 AT counter M70 game interval minimum timer S sub control board , S10 LED lamp S20 speaker, S30 turn back light S40 effect display device, SC sub-control chip E power board, E10 power switch H medal payout device, H10s first payout sensor H20s second payout sensor, H40 hopper H50 disk, H50a Disc rotation axis H60 Game medal exit, H70 Ejection urging means H80 Hopper motor S50 Bed button lamp, S60 stop button lamp K turn body board, K10 turn body motor K20 turn body sensor IN relay board, SB sub input button K c High security obstacle counter, YKc-1 advantageous section remaining game number counter FZt Freeze execution timer RU Reel unit, BU pedestal, H62 discharge guide, H64 slope HS medal auxiliary tank, BS screw, DE full detection electrode M55 1st End, M57 second end, M58 overlapped portion, M59 cut MW reel frame, MO reel band

Claims (1)

A reel unit including a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols,
A gaming machine housing with an open front,
A front door that is connected to a left side of the gaming machine housing in a front view via a hinge mechanism and that can be opened and closed,
Internal drawing means,
Reel control means for controlling the reel;
With
It is configured so that a power-off process can be performed after a power-off occurs,
Inside the gaming machine housing,
The reel unit;
A fixing portion for fixing the reel unit,
A main tank member for storing game media,
An auxiliary tank member that is installed near the main tank member and stores game media overflowing from the main tank member;
Is provided,
A slope portion descending from the main tank member toward the auxiliary tank member is provided in a part of the main tank member,
The reel unit and the fixing portion are configured to be held by a plurality of locking components having conductivity,
In a state in which the reel unit and the fixing portion are held by the plurality of locking parts, a predetermined locking on the rightmost side in the front view of the gaming machine housing among the plurality of locking parts. The slope portion is disposed vertically below the component,
In a state where the auxiliary tank member is installed inside the gaming machine housing, a first member and a second member for detecting whether the game medium stored in the auxiliary tank member is full or not. At least, the distance between the first member and the second member is configured to be longer than the longitudinal length of the predetermined locking component,
In the game in which a predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel control means is configured to stop a predetermined symbol combination based on a stop operation of the player being received,
In a game in a predetermined game state and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reels stopped due to a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player being received have the predetermined symbol. After the symbols corresponding to the combination are stopped, and after the stop operation is received at a predetermined timing for a predetermined reel corresponding to the final stop operation of the player after the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, It is configured to be able to provide a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination to a player,
In the game in the predetermined gaming state, and in which the predetermined result is determined by the internal drawing means, the reel stopped by receiving a stop operation other than the final stop operation of the player has the predetermined The symbols corresponding to the symbol combinations are stopped, and the plurality of reels are stopped despite the stop operation being received at the predetermined timing with respect to the predetermined reel as a final stop operation of the player thereafter. A game characterized in that a game medium corresponding to the predetermined symbol combination can be provided to a player even in a predetermined situation where the predetermined symbol combination is not stopped when the game is stopped. Machine.

Images